Home

Lincoln 2011 Town Car Automobile User Manual

1. 302 301 The high current fuses are coded as follows Location Rating 1 2 3 Ignition switch Powertrain control module PCM keep alive power and canister vent Fuel relay feed 10 Pasa ute relay Teed 7 4 2089 5 20A Imstrument panel power point 3 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 5A 0A 0A 5A 0A 5A 0A 200 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies EE Location Rating RASM Stop lamp switch gt otusei ot used Injectors 33 Ntwed pa Nosed 18 Newed 201 15 ISA Lumbar Fuel door 18 14 15 16 17 18 9 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Location 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Ol 02 03 04 501 502 503 601 602 Fuse Amp Rating Micro relay Micro relay Micro relay Micro relay Micro relay Mini relay Mini relay Mini relay Mini relay Diode Diode 20A Circuit Breaker 20A Circuit Breaker ot used Ful o Power seats driver seat module Delayed accessory relay for windows audio N PC N Fu N N A C clutch el
2. 268 service points 235 236 starting after a collision 194 Engine block heater 180 Enginenoil 237 change oil soon warning message center 237 checking and adding 237 GIPSTICK asserit eere 237 filter specifications 239 267 recommendations 239 refill capacities 268 specifications 268 Event data recording T Exhaust fumes 180 F Fail safe cooling 246 Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV 248 Floor mats seaside sacks 68 69 Fluid capacities 268 iD A 248 calculating fuel ECONOMY seras E RR 22 255 COND MERC c MER RR ENTE 251 Capacity ARN 268 choosing the right fuel 252 detergent in fuel 253 filling your vehicle with FUEL essetis 248 251 255 filter specifications 248 267 fuel filler door override 71 fuel filler door release 70 fuel pump shut off switch 194 improving fuel economy 255 octane rating 258 271 QUaliby 2a EE e RS 253 running out of fuel 254 safety information relating to automotive fuels 248 Fuel flex fuel vehicle EEV seien 248 252 253 FUSES teen ise
3. 226 instrument panel 228 303 Index ID UG EIOE oe ee esae et ea IPOD plastic parts Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating Clock Compass electronic set zone adjustment Console rear Controls POWEF Seat srne cites steering column Coolant checking and adding refill capacities 245 specifications Cruise control see Speed control Customer Assistance Ford Extended Service PIST AR 216 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada Getting roadside assistance Getting the service you need Ordering additional owner s literature Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration PROBTAMN 25er eripe D Daytime running lamps see Lamps 304 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 193 Defrost rear window 41 Dipstick automatic transmission iil io CNET 261 engine 0il 237 Driving under special conditions 191 through water 192 E Electronic message center 18 Emergencies roadside jump starting oo ee 211 Emergency Flashers 194 Emission control system 258 Engine sse eov 271 CLEANING Hira man be 226 COOIAING eeann anane tices 242 fail safe cooling 246 idle speed control 240 lubrication specifications 268 refillcapacities
4. 4 Press and release the button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful If your garage door does not operate repeat the previous steps in this section After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home lighting repeat Steps 1 through 4 substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener For example you could assign the left most button to the garage door the center button to a security device and the right most button to another garage door opener 65 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Note The Car2U system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it is necessary to erase the current settings using the Erasing the Car2U9 Home Automation System buttons procedure and then programming all of the devices being used Fixed code programming Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitt
5. 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location 3 Make vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO win DATE GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Label The following table tells you FRONT GAWR XXXXL REARGAMR KXAKLE which transmission each code XXXXKG WTH XXXXKG WITH represents XXX A eg NOA AT XXX kPa XX PSLOOLI AT XXX APa XX PSICOLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XX000000000000000 XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXTPNT XX RC XX DSO WB BRK INTTR TRIPS TR TAXLE SPR XXXXX XX X XX X XX XXX XXX J000000000000 XMM XXXX XXXXXXX XX Four speed automatic 4R75E O QT 273 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories LINCOLN CUSTOM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Lincoln Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each access
6. 217 223 224 225 Table of Contents Maintenance and Specifications 233 Engine compartment 235 Engine oil 237 Battery 240 Engine coolant 242 Fuel information 248 Air filter s 263 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 268 Engine data 271 Accessories 274 Ford Extended Service Plan 276 Scheduled Maintenance Guide 280 Normal scheduled maintenance and log 286 Index 303 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2010 Ford Motor Company 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e n the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e n Mexico www ford com mx e n Australia www ford com au Additional owner information is given in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and mo
7. Brown 8A L Natural Bac Black Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by the brake pedal Remove the panel cover to access the fuses To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover 196 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 27 l 25 MM 23 21 19 DR 34 L0 28 Ln 2D 6e 18 O 16 44 D 12 lU 10 m 17 m 15 m 153 m fm 9 m iz ID je im ii D ft Li 8 U 6 O 4 D 2 U Back up lamps Anti lock brake system ABS Lighting control module LCM 10A Passive anti theft system PATS Powertrain control module PCM relay coil Ignition relay coil Fuel relay coil 197 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 10A Power decklid module PDM Overdrive cancel switch Cluster Compass module LCM Traction control switch 7 5A Door lock switch illumination Heated seat switch illumination Electrochromatic mirror 13 10A Extended rear park aide module KN a EN 14 15A Adjustable pedals Delayed e aya 15 10A Dual automatic temperature om ye ii 17 10A A C cyc
8. e winch out available within 100 feet 30 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Canadian customers refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at www ford ca for information on Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the 193 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself F
9. If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing gallons of fuel used by 100 miles traveled kilometers traveled by liters used your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up 19 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the RESET control press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings FUEL ECONOMY MPG L km f This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from poor economy to f excellent economy Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy When your vehicle is not moving this function shows one or no bars illuminated Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset TIMER Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time To operate do the following 1 Press and release RESET in order to start the timer 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Pr
10. Parts other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized remanufactured parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability It is the owner s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information Non Ford approved chemicals or additives are not required for factory recommended maintenance In fact Ford Motor Company recommends against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Ford for a particular application Oil fluids and flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed However discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury Dealership Your vehicle s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical G
11. WARNING Before operating the power decklid be sure that no one particularly a child is in a position where he or she can be injured by the trunk lid NEVER leave the remote entry transmitter where it can be inadvertently activated as someone could be seriously injured by a moving decklid 83 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Anti scan feature If the wrong code has been entered seven times 35 consecutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the ei control on the remote entry transmitter e the ignition is turned to the on position SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Radio type approval numbers for Immobilizer S
12. 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL Turns the lamps off SOCE Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZO Turns the headlamps on Autolamp control The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a preselected period of time after the ignition switch is turned to off The autolamps are turned on at night or when the front wipers are turned on e To turn autolamps on rotate the control counterclockwise The preselected time lapse is adjustable up to approximately three minutes See the programming procedure following e To turn autolamps off rotate the control clockwise to the off position O The amount of time the autolamps stay on can be programed by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition to off 2 Turn the headlamp switch to the autolamp position Note Steps 3 through 5 need to be performed within 10 seconds 3 Turn the headlamp switch to off 4 Turn the ignition to on and then back to off 5 Turn the headlamp switch to the autolamp position e At this point the exterior lamps turn on 42 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 6 Wait the desired amount of time for delay then turn the headlamp switch to off e At this poin
13. A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 155 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing
14. COLD TIRE PRESSURE TIRE PRESSION DES SEE OWNER S PNEU PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR o e ADDITIONAL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI INFORMATION REAR P235 70R16 240 KPA as psi VORLEMANUEL SPARE POUR PLUS DE secours 1145 90R17 415 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS 0000000000000000X ULU LL 7 x x x x x x x x x x R x amp CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 168 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passenger
15. Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B D or F J Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 232 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e D
16. Mini Fuses Cartridge Fuses CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare 202 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your tire pressure monitoring system TPMS and should not be used However if you must use a sealant the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer WARNING Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WA
17. OUTULIAJOP 03 UOUVWUALOfUL BDUDUAIUIOUL poympewyos 0 1ajoy oseurep uorssrursue1 osneo few pm popueurumooor ou uey 19y30 PM Aue Jo as osuel Surjerodo ewou S YOSdIp y uo uoreorpur ayy Aq Jas oq prnouys J949fJ p nyj pue pny uorssrmusueg jo junoure au 19 002 xuej ut ue yya peddmbo jt pue ozI S 19 009 uo poseq Area Lew suorjeordde eurog Ajroedeo qtg amp rp ejeurxodde ATUO soyeorpuy rev UOLO Tdv 9u pue v 0660cIN SSA uoneogroeds pJo p Jo sjueurombod y 3eeur ATUO p u ro uSuy A1ojepueui JOU ST JO 103our pue q orjeugu s 10 oneuu s Jo SNg epngea INOA ul peddmbo AjreurStro ed43 juepooo au PPY suoneogroeds p1o p 499W 0 pO spmy exe1q Aquo 3S ping Jousea p onisput epeuer prn 76V 9TdSIA HSA J9USEM p 9IUSpUIA Cepeur9 Apend umruro4q poumboz se ma 4 pue q g v 4e 0XO Sf 91e31uo2uo SM V 28 97 J9YSEM PT9TUSPUTM UMIMIBIG g1J219107ONN p104 ogumu 34ed pIo JO oureu Ied pJo q 2 270 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Town Car tow USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA Engine 4 6L V8 engine 4 6L FFV V8 engine Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane or ethanol E 85 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 1 3 7 2 6 5 4 8 Coil on plug Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0 052 0 056 inch 0 041 0 047 inch 1 32 1 42 mm 1 04 1 20 mm 271 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Com
18. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise then pull it out of the lamp assembly 5 Pull the bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 6 To complete installation follow the removal procedure in reverse order Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then remove two T screws grommets and the license plate lamp assembly from the trunk lid E 4 2 Carefully pull the bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 3 Install the lamp assembly on the trunk lid with two grommets ensuring the grommets are pushed all the way in to the trunk lid and secure with two screws 51 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing backup lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the trunk and carefully pull the trunk lid ek liner away to expose the lamp assembiy 2 Remove bulb socket from the M trunk lid by turning it counterclockwise 3 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb 4 Install the bulb socket in trunk lid by turning clockwise Replacing high mount brake lamp assembly To change the high mount brake lamp assembly 1 Remove the high mount brake lamp assembly from the headliner MN 7 by pulling downward on the assembiy 2 Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the assembiy 3
19. The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Accessory delay With accessory delay the power window switches and radio may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off or until any door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side 57 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if equipped The interior rear view mirror and a driver s side exterior mirror have an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirrors will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the interior mirror When the interior mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle the interior rear view mirror and the driver s side exterior mirror if equipped will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle i
20. backup power and the airbag ignitors WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision WARNING If the safety belt pretensioners deploy in an accident they will not function again belt will not extract or retract and must be replaced immediately Failure to replace the retractor assemblies will increase the risk of injury Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions 119 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate The front passenger sensing system will disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects
21. below the locator symbols on the seat back Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown Two plastic LATCH guides can be obtained at no charge from an authorized dealer They snap onto the LATCH lower anchors in the seat 137 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints to help attach a child seat with rigid attachments The guides hold the seat trim away to expose the anchor and make it easier to attach some child seats WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions center seating use The lower anchors at the
22. chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter for information BRAKE 182 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving A WARNING If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply your brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective Under normal operating conditions brake dust may accumulate on the wheels Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with soapy water and a soft sponge Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A Anti lock brake system ABS This vehicle is equipped with an anti lock braking system ABS A noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel bumps wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle s anti lock brake system If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake applications and compensates for this tendency The
23. e The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage e Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature e With your foot on the brake shift through all the gears while the engine is running Fuel system e Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle Note During extended periods of vehicle storage 30 days or more fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation Add Motorcraft Gas Stabilizer or equivalent meeting Ford material specification ESE M99C112 A to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 30 days Follow the instructions on the additive label The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system 265 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Cooling system e Protect against freezing temperatures e When removing vehicle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery e Check and recharge as necessary Keep connections clean e f storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Note If batter
24. 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 260 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type BRAKE
25. 195 196 G Garage door opener 62 Gas cap see Fuel cap 251 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 255 EDDIE 16 H Hazard flashers 194 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Headlamps verroeste 42 eg iepening 44 autolamp system 42 bulb specifications 47 daytime running lights 43 flash to PASS serene 43 MsN Deam rccte ecce ens 43 replacing bulbs 49 turning on and off 42 HOGA MH 234 I Ignition 177 271 Illuminated visor mirror 54 Infant seats see Safety seats 131 Inspection maintenance I M i niger A E 259 Instrument panel Cleaning s A EA PA a heen 228 e b 5 GN A 12 lighting up panel and INGETION i3 neo 44 J JACK dm 202 pOSIUODI ues ect 202 Stora BC pp 202 Jump starting your vehicle 211 K Keyless entry system keypad 82 locking and unlocking doors 83 programming entry code 82 KEYS onsectetuer ete e 72 86 positions of the ignition 177 305 Index L Oil see Engine oil 237 Lamps P autolamp system 42 bulb replacement specifications Chart 47 Parking brake 184 daytime running light 43 Parts Headlamps
26. 262 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature 50 F 95 F 10 C 35 C High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element Wh
27. Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the Speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart 156 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law QT 99 mph EI Why PR 106 mp
28. Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 114 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold
29. D Lis oe aired 272 trailer towing 178 i wrecker assertum hen 215 Vehicle loading 166 Traction control 185 Ventilating your vehicle 180 Traction lok rear axle 188 Transmission 189 W brake shift interlock BSI 188 m fluid checking and adding Warning lights see Lights 12 automatic 261 oan fluid refill capacities 268 Water Driving Tangui sosem 192 lubricant specifications 268 Windows basi p 75 POWEL arssensteece eee eise re Ee 57 remote release 70 78 Windshield washer fluid and Turn signal s is 46 O WIpeTS irnn 53 U replacing wiper blades 237 Universal garage door opener 62 Wrecker towing iseci 215 308 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus
30. D mew C BASS S HERE ge 16 AM sc 4 SEEK TUNE CAT gt re FADE 1 i nev ea WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window switches radio and moon roof if equipped may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until any door is opened 1 CD slot Insert a CD label side up With the ignition on the radio will begin to play a CD once inserted If the ignition and audio system are off press CD prior to inserting a disc Do not force a disc into the system as damage could result 26 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 CD eject Press to eject a CD If a the disc is not removed within the allotted time the system will automatically reload the CD and begin play Note The eject function will work when the ignition and audio systems are turned off 3 BASS Press BASS then press lt Q SEL TEXT P gt to decrease increase the level of bass ie output
31. FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels below the MAX line that do not trigger the brake system warning lamp are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of your brake system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot 261 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 30 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface
32. Ford ESP plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental When you purchase Ford ESP you receive peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of Ford Motor Company dealers For more information visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www ford ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you NOTE Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Ford ESP coverage This information is subject to change 279 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Why maintain your vehicle This guide describes the scheduled maintenance required for your vehicle Carefully following this schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is performed and that the materials used meet Ford engineering specifications Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specific in this guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Be sure receipts for completed maintenance are kept with the vehicle and confirmation of the work performed is
33. Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating amd Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health
34. USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide ISTY SOO IOoA9UOTUAV x peddmbo jt 10914 are urqeo ssuIyy esea18 quw peddmbo jt oyeouguj syurol pue 3jeuseAup spud po an uotsuedsns syutol feq e8exurp BUL199 S pesos quem cm e poddmibo Ji siooq yeUs Tey ek xe efe pa ali SpTONS Jes pur UIOISAS nero ef deb feb ped pue pueris T ues BUlfppo suite oxe1q Sued pue sasoy ayerq swumap S107041 saoys sped oxe1q Sjuouroumbod JoJ 19 eop 3 suo YonSd p uu peddmba JD eA9 pmy uoisstusuer oreurojne 2edsu 2odsu 2edsu 2edsu S9SOY 2odsu sgutulj 2edsu 2edsu Pe fo te fe fo te fe fo e o pepueururooo1 uorjoedsur yurod ymur ULIOJ1ag 3e1p 10 ssouosoo TEIM 9STOU Teuuouqe 10J sjuauoduroo poje a1 pue soom elele kaale el kk ke aleni p dsur sem Ee s pecpsscpse aes poe ss oet SOT 96 vs cL 09 sr 96 vc zr 000 T X 812939 s exo o eee e e oe e sr sz wr semi 2odsu y dap 3709 19114 pue po autguo esueyy oo ve sr ev oe Jos vc er er 9 e woy 287 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Town Car tow USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide ISIH S9U109 IOASUPTY AA x Cp e EIL CEE sgunjj 952913 Yy p ddmb jt e3eouqnr 5sjurof j pue 3jeuseAup spue po1 on uorsuedsns squtof reg eSexuip 3UL1991S 799dSUJ LL DD A be y sod yee Te oes E D E N SpTa1us yeay pue u191S4S jsneuxo
35. VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace 292 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance Guide SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS If you operate your Ford Lincoln Mercury vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding Special Operating Conditions listed below you will need to have some items maintained more frequently If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under these conditions it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance For specific recommendations see your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician Towing a trailer or using a camper or car top carrier Inspect frequently service as Inspect and lubricate U oints required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread
36. allowing the alarm to be armed After the 20 second pre arm phase the interior trim remote trunk release control and the interior trim power door unlock control are disabled in order to further protect your vehicle 88 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Disarming the system You can disarm the system by any of the following actions e Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter e Unlock the doors using a valid code on the keypad e Unlock the doors with the key in the key lock cylinder e Turn the ignition to the on position 89 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING Adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion The adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 2 3 e a guide sleeve adjust release button 3 AL e and a guide sleeve unlock remove SO ON button 4 To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding po
37. allows the electrical 2 accessories such as the radio to 4 operate while the engine is not Q running 3 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section in the Locks and Security chapter for information on SecuriLock keys Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine avoid pressing the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire 177 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be
38. and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick i and the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C However if fluid is added at this time an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating i Y temperature 150 F 170 F r yj 66 C 77 C
39. and the park lamps will flash if all the closures are closed If any closure is not closed the horn will chirp twice and the park lamps will not flash Car finder Press twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the park lamps tail lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Opening the trunk q Press L once to open the trunk If your vehicle is fitted with the optional power decklid press 3 twice to open the trunk and twice to close it WARNING Before operating the power decklid be sure that no one particularly a child is in a position where he or she can be injured by the trunk lid NEVER leave the remote entry transmitter where it can be inadvertently activated as someone could be seriously injured by a moving decklid e Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your vehicle Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall out or block the driver s rear view The remote entry system allows you to open the trunk while the ignition is in any position However if the ignition is in the on position and the gearshift is in D Drive the trunk will only open if the vehicle is moving 3 mph 5 km h or slower Sounding a panic alarm Press c on the remote transmitter to activate the alarm Note The panic alarm only works with the ignition in the off position Press c a second time to deactivate the a
40. as possible 24 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use Note this includes the use of the optional full sized matching spare tire and wheel For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK COMPASS MOD Displayed when the compass is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Refer to Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 1096 or less OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 096 An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS 25 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS Premium AM FM Stereo Single CD Cassette system O gem o 18 Onn TAPE SAT
41. be disabled Have the system serviced immediately Refer to the Driving chapter for more information y da d Severity indicator Displays the indicated severity color when any of the following warning conditions has occurred e Red Low Oil Pressure Charge System Engine Coolant Over Temperature Door Ajar e Amber Low Fuel Refer to Message center in this chapter 14 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster equipped Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Low tire pressure warning if e O D off Illuminates when the 0 D overdrive function of the transmission has been turned off OFF refer to the Driving chapter If the light does not illuminate have the transmission serviced soon or damage may occur Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn sign
42. brake release lever Pull the lever to manually release the parking brake TRACTION CONTROL Your vehicle is equipped with a traction control system except on commercial conversion packages This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow or ice covered roads and gravel roads The system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction in these conditions 185 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving During traction control operation the traction control active light will f illuminate you may hear an electric motor type of sound coming from the engine compartment and the engine Will not rev up when you press farther on the accelerator This is normal system behavior and should be no reason for concern WARNING Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal injury or property damage The occurrence of a traction control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If you experience a severe road event SLOW DOWN The traction control switch located on the left side of the instrument panel allows the driver to enable and disable the system Whe
43. center of the second row rear seat are spaced 570 mm 22 4 inches apart The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases 138 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When
44. child stay seated like this for the whole trip Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat 142 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap
45. closed while the engine is running e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle s speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h Autounlock The auto unlock feature will unlock all doors when e the ignition has been in the on position all doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 3 mph 5 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the accessory or off position and the driver door is opened within ten minutes after the ignition was transitioned to the accessory or off position Note The vehicle doors will not auto unlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked prior to the driver door being opened Deactivating activating the autolock or autounlock feature Autolocking and autounlocking are independent features either feature may be enabled or disabled without affecting the other You must complete Steps 1 7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait at least 30 seconds Note Before following the procedure make sure that the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors the hood and the decklid are closed 73 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 1 Turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on to the off
46. coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained If coolant is filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is not cool the system will remain underfilled 243 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolant is used DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and new unused coolant together in the vehicle Mixing of engine coolants may harm
47. depth Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Change engine oil and replace oil filter 6 months Inspect and lubricate U joints Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid except 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Change manual transmission fluid 293 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Extensive idling and or low speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery taxi patrol car or livery Inspect frequently service as Replace cabin air filter if equipped required Replace engine air filter Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Inspect brake system Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if equipped with grease fittings Rotate fires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Inspect and lubricate Ujoints 6 months Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Change engine oil and replace oil filter 6 months or 200 hours of engine operation Every 15 000 miles 24 000 km Replace fuel filter Crown Victoria Grand Marquis and Town Car Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid except 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Replace spark plugs 294 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st
48. display for approximately 10 seconds at which time the display will return to the previous mode You may also exit the menu options by pressing any other audio control Setting the clock Your vehicle is equipped with a separate in dash clock Refer to Clock in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on how to set the time 8 Cassette Insert a cassette facing to the right 9 TUNE Press to manually go up or down the radio frequency TUNE caT gt CAT CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio Your vehicle may be equipped with Satellite ready capability The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 10 Side 1 2 Press to access the next side of the cassette tape The display will indicate whether TAPE 1 or TAPE 2 is playing 11 SEEK Press to access the B um next previous radio station tape selection or CD track Press and hold to advance reverse in the current CD track 29 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 12 REW Rewind Press to rewind in tape or CD mode FF Fast forward Press to fast forward in tape or CD mode 13 SCAN Press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of radio stations selections or CD tracks Press again to stop 14 SHUF Shuffle Press to play the t
49. e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time e To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items 181 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type
50. edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns 148 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Prin
51. eject a specific CD press eject and the corresponding preset number If no preset is selected the system will eject the currently selected CD Press and hold to eject all loaded discs Note If the CD is not removed within approximately 15 seconds the system will reload the disc and begin play if the system is on 6 BASS Press BASS then RES press lt Q SEL TEXT to E decrease increase the level of bass mes output TREB Treble Press TREB then press SEL TEXT to ld decrease increase the level of treble ms output 7 BAL Balance Press BAL then press SEL TEXT P gt to shift sound to the left right speakers 32 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems FADE Press FADE then press lt Q SEL TEXT P gt to shift sound to the rear front speakers 8 SEL TEXT Use with Bass Treble Balance Fade and other menu functions TEXT TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio Your vehicle may be equipped with Satellite ready capability The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 9 MENU Press MENU repeatedly co to access RBDS ON or OFF Use lt Q SEL TEXT to turn RBDS ON or OFF Press MENU again to access Program type mode or Show Type mode MENU must be press
52. filter FG 986B Included in long wheelbase package For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 267 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications JIOAJOSOI A NOOYHN ALV A sNOOWSIN Me pad WO e LX J 19 1030 A NIW U99M19g S19pUNA9 yoo queoniqnT yoo pue Surjerjeuoq 1J 191030 X ong s gejd 19YL S souoqe sosuly J pe1oroo Mo oA 1911 A a quejoog eurBug prop f e quejooo suur EDA UMUM 61J21910JON i 9 81 V vdeIW HSd jueorLiqn q 97IX Ke1dg Uog o SALS19YJ89M 1000 ypj IOAJ9S9L m vegoswtSsa PMAPPWPATION nosy pm pingar je e LOG 9 ueuuoj19q cdd 1 O T Wd USH oe NIN pH uorvogri ods juo peAmbo Aypedeer way p104 ogumu 34ed ps0 JO oureu Ied pJo q eo S3lLIOVdVO ANY SNOILVOIJIO3dS LONGOYd 39NVN3INIVIN ci yuojeamb9 10 GTX 10 p 9X 9eseouo osodanq nmyy syoe1 yeas dq 860TIW dSH 9seo18 umngrT pue Sun 100p 194 8 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Town Car tow USA fus Maintenance and Specifications V c6T9GINISM TO OVTMGL AX V L6TOCN dS
53. fluid CHECKING ee 261 fluid refill capacities 268 fluid specification 268 Auxiliary power point 55 Axle lubricant specifications 268 refill capacities 268 tactionlok 188 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus B Battery oett ee teeters 240 acid treating emergencies 240 jumping a disabled battery 211 maintenance free 240 replacement specifications 267 SOEVICIIUB siaren rii 240 Belt Minder 110 Booster seats 141 Brakes aa e b 182 183 antslock e NR 183 anti lock brake system ABS Warming S N selam asa 184 fluid checking and adding 261 fluid specifications 268 lubricant specifications 268 shift interlock 188 Bulbs sons eve em ES 46 C Capacities for refilling fluids 268 Car2U9 Home Automation DVSUCIM vss serisi asama ee REUS 62 Cell phone use 8 Changing a tre 202 Child safety seats 131 attaching with tether SLEADS iicet ere es 139 in front Seat 131 IN rear Seal eese 131 135 LATCH essin sireni 136 recommendations 129 Child safety seats booster ea Mp MK E 141 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment
54. for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat 165 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the saf
55. fus Maintenance and Specifications ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent
56. heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle 180 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching
57. is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system Both the driver s and passenger s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Minder feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approxima
58. is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with deploying airbag may also cause abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control 118 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The SRS consists of the following items e Driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags safety belt pretensioners Front passenger sensing system Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter Driver and passenger side airbags Seat mounted side airbag system One or more impact and safing sensors A readiness light and tone A diagnostic module e The electrical wiring which connects the components The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits as well as the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag
59. longer needed Do not use tire chains on dry roads VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating 166 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payl
60. may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert Fasten Safety Belt Airbag Side Child Seat Tether Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System Master Lighting Switch Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Defrost Demist 10 AN A xe il 8 O 96v See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist E e OQ Ss ddp 329 en E 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary PURSE WONS ZE Power Window Lockout BAY Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Luggage Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm Engine Oil NA Engine Coolant Temperature Ej ym Engine Coolant X DOPO Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid CR ss e LH Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter AP o Compartment e e Jack lt
61. once the garage door moves During this time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Do not release the button until you see the garage door move Most garage doors open quickly You may need to hold the button from 5 55 seconds before observing movement of the garage door 6 The indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete If your garage door opener does not operate following these steps repeat Steps 2 through 6 Otherwise call the toll free Car2U9 help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command Erasing the Car2U9 Home Automation System buttons Note The system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it will be necessary to erase the current settings using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices being used 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls To erase programming on the CarZU system individual buttons cannot be erased use the following procedure 1 Firmly press the two outside Car2U system buttons simultaneously for approximately e eO 20 sec
62. position except in the on position when the transmission is in any gear other than P Park or N Neutral If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Unlocking the doors 1 Press and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps will illuminate 2 Press D and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors Security lighting Your vehicle s headlamps and park lamps will illuminate if e it is dark outside evening e the headlamp control is in the autolamp position and e the unlock control is pressed on the remote entry transmitter The headlamps and park lamps remain illuminated e for 25 seconds or e until you turn the ignition from the off position or e until the vehicle doors are locked using the remote entry transmitter or the power door unlock control Locking the doors amp Press A and release to lock all the doors Note The interior lamps will turn off and the park lamps will flash if all the closures doors trunk hood are closed If any closure is not closed the park lamps will not flash l 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Press and release again within five seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp once
63. shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest and seatback upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 36 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 128 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X LATCH lower lower Restraint Child anchors anchors Type Weight and top only tether anchor Rear Up to facing 48 Ib X X child seat 21 kg Forward Up to facing 48 Ib X X X child seat 21 kg Forward Over facing 48 Ib X X child seat 21 kg WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all
64. sit in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person 103 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under sh
65. spare tire wheel information This spare tire wheel will match the road tire wheel When driving with the full size matching spare tire wheel do not exceed 70 mph 113 km h It is intended for temporary use only This means if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Park on a level surface activate hazard flashers and set parking brake 2 Place gearshift lever in P Park and turn engine off Removing the spare tire and jack Mini spare 1 Remove the carpeted wheel cover located on the right hand side next to the wheel well 2 Remove the wing nut bolt assembly that secures the spare tire and jack by turning it counterclockwise 205 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING On vehicles equipped with air suspension turn off the air suspension switch prior to jacking hoisting or towing your vehicle Refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter for more information 3 Remove the lug wrench A from the jack Rotate the lug wrench Socket out from the handle Full size spare if equipped 1 Remove the carpeted wheel cover lt lt 2 Remove the wing nut bolt lt e assembly that secures the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise amp L 206 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 3 Remove the jack The jack is located in the trunk
66. storing your vehicle for an extended period of time 30 days or more refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components 264 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications General e Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place e Protect from sunlight if possible e If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Body e Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders See the Cleaning chapter for more information Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations e Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust e Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration Re wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed See the Cleaning chapter for more information Lubricate all hood door and trunk lid hinges and latches with a light grade oil See the Cleaning chapter for more information e Cover interior trim to prevent fading e Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents Engine
67. the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death 129 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increas
68. toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine s idle revolutions per minute RPM When the engine starts the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off 3 Make sure the gearshift is in P 4 Make sure the parking brake is set 178 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 5 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start 3 Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start 2 Turn the key to 4 start then release the key as soon as the e
69. used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with tether straps amp Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked with the tether anchor symbol shown with title The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions v shown from top view i Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the low
70. vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating 181 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e nsert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to help prevent accidental unbuckling e Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to Step 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint a
71. wheels are prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied The accompanying illustration depicts the advantage of an ABS equipped vehicle on bottom to a non ABS equipped vehicle on top during hard braking with loss of front braking traction Using ABS e n an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four wheel ABS is required apply continuous force on the brake The four wheel ABS will be activated immediately thus allowing you to retain steering control of your vehicle and providing there is sufficient space will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled stop 183 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving e The anti lock system does not reduce stopping distance Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop e We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking technique However avoid taking any unnecessary risks ABS warning lamp The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate momentarily at start up remains on or continues to flash the ABS needs to be serviced With the ABS light on the anti lock brake system is disabled and normal braking is still effective unless the brake warning light also remains BRAKE illuminated with parking brake released If your brake warning lamp illuminates hav
72. will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle This includes the optional full sized matching spare wheel and tire as it is intended for temporary use only To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section 163 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system Low tire Possible Customer action required pressure cause warning light Solid warning Tire s 1 Check your tire pressure to ensure light under inflated tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 32 km h before the light will turn off Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is
73. with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road 153 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can
74. 0 km 289 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Maintenance schedule log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Houns MiLEAGE 290 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance Guide 291 Scheduled Maintenance Guide DEALER
75. 1 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Lengthen the lap belt To lengthen the belt hold the tongue so that its bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the tongue up the webbing 2 Place the child safety seat in the center seating position 3 Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue 5 Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt 6 Before placing the child into the child seat forcibly tilt the child seat from side to side and in forward direction to make sure that the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 7 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Note There is no top tether anchor for the front center seating position See Attaching child safety seats with tether st
76. 145 80D16 is an example of a tire size SRA 456180016 Tog Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire NA y Sa 09 o 3 Wo ssn je 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 160 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked
77. 2U Home Automation System if equipped The Car2U Home Automation System is a universal transmitter located in the driver s visor that includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home The Car2U9 system s garage door opener function replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the interior of your vehicle After being programmed for garage doors the Car2U system transmitter can be programmed to operate security devices and home lighting systems 62 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls WARNING Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Do not use the Car2U9 system with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future CarZU9 system programming It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed Car2U system buttons should be erased for security reasons Refer to Erasing the Car2U9 Home Automation System buttons later in this section Read the instructio
78. 5 cm of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Installing child safety seats in the lap belt seating positions WARNING Installing a child safety seat in the front row lap seating position should be avoided if at all possible WARNING Never place a rear facing child seat in the front center seating position of a vehicle with rear seating positions WARNING Front seating positions only If seating two adults and a child Ford recommends properly restraining the child in the center front seating position but only if doing so will not interfere with driving the vehicle This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment method for a child restraint If the child seat interferes with driving the vehicle and the child restraint is forward facing the child may be restrained in the passenger seat Move the seat as far rearward as possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front passenger airbag Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts Ensure the child is properly restrained in an appropriate child seat or with the use of a booster 135 201
79. 799dSuJ pue Y13U91 S 10J ure1s s Fuyoo sugua ayelq Sued pue sosoy SBUTUTJ oxe1q SUMIP S10701 saoys sped oxe1q 199dSuf t Sjueurambod JO Jo eop 3 msuo Y9nSd p y m peddmbo JD eae pm uorssmusue oreurojne 799dSUJ pepueururooo1 uonoedsut qutod rjmur unojroq 321p 10 ssauasoo Team ISTOU TeuLlouge 10J Syu9uodulo9 poje o1 pue s oouA 32edsu idop peor ounseour pue IeaM 911 yoodsut S 378104 Jay pue Io eutguo ogueu EN ZHEN i 822 e vi m EE 80 m N N v e vd 000 T X S193ouro ry 000 T X sem vd N BH 10 vi 288 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Town Car tow USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Every 15 000 miles Replace cabin air filter if equipped ekmem i pe sinir Gf eaid 48 000 km Gf equipped Replace fuel filter Crown Victoria Grand Every 105 000 miles 168 000 km Inspect accessory drive belt s Every 150 000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter 240 000 km filter not reguired on 6F35 6F50 DPS6 and AWF 21 transmissions consult dealer for requirements within the last 100 000 miles 160 000 km Replace timing belt Fiesta Failure to replace timing belt can cause internal engine damage Initial replacement at 105 000 miles 160 000 km or 72 months every 45 000 miles 72 000 km or 36 months thereafter Perform a follow up inspection at 120 000 miles 192 00
80. Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners 100 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants like infants in rear facing child seats this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the risk of unne
81. Install the new assembly by aligning the tabs and pushing upward until it snaps in place 52 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end x of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick press and hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e a long press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to five seconds Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will happen a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down from the top of the windshield caused by the washing Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Windshield wiper washer features When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight and the headlamp control is
82. Loading calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing vehicle Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km Note The L series Town Car extended length is NOT rated for towing Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components carefully after towing Your loaded trailer should weigh no more than 1 500 Ib 680 kg Do not exceed the GVWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The GCW of your vehicle and trailer should not exceed 6 600 Ib 2 993 kg WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds t
83. M TO 06M08 AX AT eNOOSWIN NIO 0LLX Ye UOTPROY 189 IdV UM V 08606IA SSAV Cepeue9 ZISHT OZMG OX0 Cepeue9 ZIdS T 0GAG OXO SM SHO 0ZMS OXe SM dS 02MS OX uornvogri ods p10 zogumu 31ed pIo eursnourg jueonmqnuT ey Ieey oneuju4g OP T MGA AVS Yeso101 0 1 queoLIqn y ev qeoy umturo4qd 06 M08 AVS e1J 191010 A ALV AT eNOOSMIN 1J8191030 X epeue9 TO IOJOW OMOYTUA 02 M AVS e3Je121030 X epeue TO 1040W um1ualg Jodng 0Z MG e AVS 13J 494010 A SM TO 1030 ONOYMUKS MA 0Z MS e AVS e172191010N g sm TO JOJOW puerg oneujusg unmod 0ZMS AVS e3J 4291030 X juo eAmbo JO oureu Ied pIo jg IP STO spud q y QOvz e0 syd 0 G f CIC 6D syrenb 6 gT 148 s renb 0 9 QDInp ORe Tey aszyr pm UOISSTUISURI orjeuiojny lo 9UIBUN 269 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Town Car tow USA fus Maintenance and Specifications w0Wnwaofua OOUDUOYUNDUL pojympewos UL SUOYUPUOJ Duwo4ed 101208dg pue swodoaoxy vas sqjuouroumbod Amp 919495 JOY BOATS eULIOU 10J posn ST PTY A olf UOYM opp 10 PAPINI peJoprsuoo 91e So Xe Ieoj loy T M ey JO ur033oq eu Mo eq Wu ET 0 ULU 9 Your c T 03 qur p T 9 xe 1eo1 ou SUMY Aq peururojep ore sonredeo yoI ootAdog ATUO so xe Tal Xo uorjoe4 JO Yor e3erduroo 10J V 8TIOGINSLSS uorjeogroeds pao p Surjoeur juopeAmbo 10 E TX IYMON UOMA eAnrmppy JO Tur SIT Zo O P PPV TRAIOJUL 92IAJ9S 9991109 9Y
84. Motorcraft part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS gj Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent 248 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle Always turn off the vehicle before fueling Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowe
85. NING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation 240 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for opti
86. NING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing WARNING On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH EDITION For King Ranch leather seats refer to a separate section in this chapter e Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth e If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors e To check for compatibility first test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing or damage to the leather LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH EDITION ONLY IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium top grain
87. Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon Y indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon C indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon C indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed
88. Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Crown Victoria police interceptor amp taxi and Executive Series Town Car eguipped with engine idle hour meter Inspect frequently service as Replace cabin air filter if equipped required Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Inspect brake system Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if equipped with grease fittings Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Inspect and lubricate Ujoints 6 months Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Change engine oil and replace oil filter see description 6 months or as indicated by below time mileage calculation Every 15 000 miles 24 000 km Replace fuel filter Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid except 6R80 transmission Every 60 000 miles 96 000 km Replace spark plugs 295 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide ENGINE IDLE HOUR METER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an idle meter to indicate how much time the vehicle is idling in P Park or N Neutral The meter is incorporated with the vehicle odometer Depressing the odometer reset button once will display the trip odometer miles km followed by a T for trip odometer Depressing the odometer re
89. RNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer 203 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair t
90. Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible Exterior chrome e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives 22b 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insec
91. Remove the five screws and the protective bulb cover from the headlamp assembly Low beam e Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the retainer e Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise then pull it straight out High beam e Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb e Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise then pull it straight out A WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated 6 To complete installation follow the removal procedure in reverse order 49 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Note To ensure a good seal attach the bulb cover and partially tighten the screws Check to ensure the gasket is fully centered Finish tightening the screws in a criss cross pattern upper left lower right etc Replacing HID low beam headlamp bulbs if equipped The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source These lamps operate at a high voltage When the bulb is burned out the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized dealer Replacing front parking lamp turn signal sidemarker cornering bulbs The front parking lamp turn signal sidemarker cornering bulbs are located in the headlamp asse
92. Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information 6 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was travelling and e Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Note EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data or infor
93. Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission P RN P 2 1 operates in gears one through four Overdrive can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control mD lt switch on the gearshift lever OFF fo Drive not shown Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed e This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive e O D OFF lamp is illuminated e Provides engine braking e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples hilly terrain heavy loads trailer towing and when engine braking is required e To return to O D overdrive mode press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated e O D Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 190 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving 2 Second This position allows for second gear only e Provides engine braking e Use to start up on slippery roads To return to Overdrive move the gearshift lever into the Overdrive position Selecting 2 Second at higher speeds will cause the transmission to downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed 1 First e Provides maximum en
94. TREB Treble Press TREB then pres lt Q SEL TEXT to decrease increase the level of treble ER output 4 BAL Balance Press BAL then pres SEL TEXT gt to shift 4 sound to the left right speakers FADE Press FADE then press lt q SEL TEXT f to shift sound to the rear front speakers 5 Phone mute Press to mute the amp playing media Press again to return to the playing media or turn the volume control to adjust the volume 6 SEL TEXT Use with Bass 1 Treble Balance Fade and other a menu functions TEXT TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio Your radio is equipped with Satellite ready capability The kit to enable satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer Detailed satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 7 MENU Press MENU repeatedly wo to access RBDS on off Use SEL to turn RBDS ON or OFF Press MENU again to access Program type mode or Show Type Name mode MENU must be pressed within 10 seconds to proceed to the next RBDS mode 27 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems The Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC recommend that FM radio broadcasters use RBDS technology to transmit information FM radio stations are independently operated and i
95. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 16 Message center 18 Entertainment Systems 26 AM FM stereo cassette with CD 26 AM FM stereo with in dash six CD 31 Climate Controls 38 Dual automatic temperature control 38 Rear window defroster 41 Lights 42 Headlamps 42 Turn signal control 46 Bulb replacement 46 Driver Controls 53 Windshield wiper washer control 58 Steering wheel adjustment 54 Power windows 57 Mirrors 57 Speed control 60 Locks and Security 72 Locks 72 Anti theft system 84 Seating and Safety Restraints 90 Seating 90 Safety restraints 99 Airbags 114 Child restraints 127 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes Traction Control Air suspension Transmission operation Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher control Fuel pump shut off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Wheel lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing Customer Assistance Reporting safety defects U S only Reporting safety defects Canada only Cleaning 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 146 146 148 161 166 173 176 177 177 182 185 187 189 193 193 194 194 195 202 210 211 215
96. WER TRUNK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a power trunk controlled by the interior trunk control the key fob or the keypad on the door If anything obstructs the power trunk while it is closing the trunk will automatically reverse to the open position provided it meets sufficient resistance Resistance must be as strong as the force of the closing trunk or stronger The force of the closing trunk increases as the trunk approaches the latched position The trunk will close with the next press of the interior trunk control or key fob button WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the luggage compartment area before using the power trunk control If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the power trunk needs to be reset To reset the power trunk e Reconnect the battery with the trunk closed e Power activate the trunk with the power interior trunk release the key fob or the keypad on the door to the full open position then power activate the same power source and fully close the trunk The power trunk is now reset 69 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL The remote trunk release control is located on the driver s door trim panel and can be operated at any time except when your perimeter alarm system is armed If your vehicle is equipped with a power trunk press the button once to open the trunk p
97. a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning light and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required The restraints control module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors front passenger sensing system and the driver seat position sensor In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired 102 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If any of these things happen even intermittently have the Personal Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Safety restraints precautions WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children
98. afety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts AL statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If uncomfortable you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort I was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 4596 in cars and by 6096 in light trucks crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m Set the example teen deaths occur 4 times more with don t wear often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people belts Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate
99. afety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the restraint system warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the restraint system warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the restraint system warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS 114 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest
100. ailure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed The pressure sensor is located opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 162 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Understanding your tire pressure monitoring system TPMS The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The low tire warning lamp will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system
101. al or the hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb D Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Turn signal chime if equipped Sounds when the turn signal lever has been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven more than 1 2 mile 0 8 km 15 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed Refer to the Message center in this chapter to change your display to a digital speedometer The digital display is more accurate than the analog gauge and may not match Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant H temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and C If it enters the red section C the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool refer to What you should know about fail safe cooling in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 4 WARNING Never remove
102. all applicable laws Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window switches and radio may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until any door is opened 1 CD slot To insert a CD press LOAD Wait to insert a CD until the system prompts you With the ignition on the radio will begin to play a CD once inserted If the ignition and audio system are off press CD prior to inserting a disc Do not force a disc into the system as damage could result 31 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 SEEK Press to access the z next previous radio station or CD track Press and hold to advance reverse in the current CD track 3 TUNE CAT Press to manually go mmm up or down the radio frequency CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio Your vehicle may be equipped with Satellite ready capability The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 4 MUTE Press to mute the playing s media Press again to return to the playing media or turn the volume control to adjust the volume 5 Eject Press to eject CD s when 4 the ignition is on or off Numbers will illuminate in the display indicating which CD slots are loaded with CDs To
103. allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent 258 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon Y indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine s
104. always recorded in this guide Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer has factory trained technicians who can perform the required maintenance using genuine Ford parts They are committed to meeting your service needs and to assuring your continuing satisfaction Protecting your investment Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To ensure the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features That s why it s important to rely upon your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information 280 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts
105. amage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives 252 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 877 are not recommended Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended a ma octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage FFV engine if equipped If your vehicle is flex fuel capable it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol Ed75 Ed85 Regular unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two fuels Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and your warranty may be invalidated It is best no
106. and possible personal injury If you should experience cold weather starting problems on Egg ethanol and neither an alternative brand of Egs ethanol nor an engine block heater is available the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will improve cold starting performance Your vehicle is designed to operate on Eg ethanol alone unleaded gasoline alone or any mixture of the two See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on ethanol If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions flexible fuel vehicles only 1 Press and hold down the accelerator 1 3 to 1 2 way to floor then crank the engine 2 When the engine starts release the key then gradually release the accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up If the engine still fails to start repeat Step 1 Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the
107. and the driver airbag module WARNING Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries WARNING Ford Motor Company recommends that an authorized dealer inspect all steering column assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the steering column assembly could result in severe injury or death in the event of a collision 115 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the steering column its adaptive module or its fuses See your authorized dealer To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position WARNING Do not put anything on or over the air bag module Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses See your authorized dealer WARNING The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of th
108. ark plugs except California e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest free finance options available e Shock absorbers Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 1096 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportunity 277 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan DHVIN 3 diz 3lvls ALIO ON LdV Ssdudav LNIHd SSV31d 3AVN 66 8908t IN 20 e4oy cZ08 xog Od d 3 P4043 01 SIU IEW pue mojaq uoneuuojur eui ejejduioo aow ujee oL idS3 P404 YIIM puipy JO 83 amp 8d BUINUAY Jag 278 Owners Guide 1st Printing 2011 Town Car tow USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan ESP Ford ESP is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company Depending on the plan you purchase Ford ESP provides benefits such as e Rental reimbursement e Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires e Roadside Assistance benefits You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford Motor Company dealership There are several
109. arts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 217 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicin
110. atalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 12 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning C light is functional it will mater illuminate when the B HAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the
111. ave been developed for flexible fuel vehicles and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers WARNING Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable If your vehicle is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 250 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others e Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel e Do not use personal elec
112. belt should be low and snug across the child s hips 143 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if
113. cac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford International Business Development Inc Customer Assistance Center P O Box 11957 Caparra Heights Station San Juan Puerto Rico 00922 1957 Telephone 800 841 FORD 3673 FAX 313 390 0804 Email prcac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center PO Box 21470 Dubai United Arab Emirates Telephone 971 4 3326084 FAX 4971 4 3327299 Email menacac ford com www me ford com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations 222 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detr
114. cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life 154 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Rear wheel drive RWD vehicles Four wheel drive 4WD All wheel drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram AAAN LLL CC TE NN NNANNAN ANNUAR R ZLILA LL LS Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel
115. cessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are E safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front passenger airbag and passenger seat mounted side airbag The system is designed to help protect small child size occupants from frontal airbag deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to proper child seating or restraint usage recommendations Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag when the passenger seat is empty The sensor turns off the passenger seat mounted side airbag when the seat is empty and the safety belt is unbuckled or buckled When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has turned off the passenger s frontal airbag the pass airbag off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is off See F
116. cessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 1 Press SETUP until PRESS SELECT FOR COMPASS CALIBRATION is displayed 2 Press the SELECT control to start the compass calibration function 3 Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE COMPASS display changes to COMPASS CALIBRATION COMPLETED It will take up to five circles to complete calibration 22 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 4 The compass is now calibrated OIL LIFE START VALUE PRESS SELECT TO CHANGE Press SELECT to change the oil life start value OIL LIFE START VALUE SET TO XXX will be displayed To reset the oil monitoring system to 10096 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months perform the following 1 Press and hold the RESET control for two seconds and release Oil life is set to 10096 and OIL LIFE XXX96 HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL is displayed 2 Press and hold the RESET control for three seconds and release Oil life is set to 10096 and OIL LIFE START VALUE SET TO XXX is displayed System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center
117. consists of the following e An inflatable bag airbag with a gas generator concealed behind the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks e A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors located near the side of the vehicle Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision 125 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unle
118. d 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise until three clicks can be heard To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications amd capacities later in this chapter for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed f
119. d call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline and or ethanol vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 8596 ethanol Any fuel blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as Fuel Ethanol To id
120. del variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on the Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle WARNING Fuel pump shut off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before Li touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted i
121. door rubber wea LC mE mi mE mE mimi mim Multi point inspection In order to keep your ve systems on your vehicle Scheduled Maintenance Guide Check every month Check function of all interior and exterior lights pressure induding spare tire Check every six months Check lap shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function Check parking brake for proper operation ABS airbag safety belt for operation coolant strength if necessary and dean all wiper blades replace as necessary Check and lubricate all hinges latches and outside locks Inspect for correct operation therstrips Inspect for excessive wear Check and dean body and door drain holes Inspect for clogs and obstructions hicle running right it is important to have the checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems Ford Motor Company recommends the following multi point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help ensure your vehicle keeps running great 2011 Town Car tow 283 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Multi point inspection Recommended at every visit Check and top up fluid levels brake coolant recovery reservoir manual and automatic transmission if equipped with an underhood dipstick power steering if equipped and window washer Inspect tires for wear and check air pressure including spare Check exhaust sy
122. duce fuel economy e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance e Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size e Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy e Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions e Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed e Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried e Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski racks may reduce fuel economy e Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Close windows for high speed driving 257 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM tC Y
123. e Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance Guide 299 Scheduled Maintenance Guide EXCEPTIONS In addition there are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule They are listed below Normal vehice axle maintenance C Rear axles and power take off PTO units containing synthetic lubricant and light duty trucks equipped with Ford design axles are lubricated for life These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected service is re quired or the axle assembly has been submerged in water The axle and PTO lubricant should be changed anytime the axle and PTO have been submerged in water During extended trailer tow operation above 70 F 21 C ambient and wide open throttle for extended periods above 45 mph 72 km h non synthetic rear axl
124. e damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection 228 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens e Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton clot
125. e negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points 212 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 213 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cable fr
126. e Chori el refi rta 7 e DEL LI ee Theda im anty a panid Rai Of visa mantar arm wst ia WOT eircom Pisane cati pour Osnes Mamusi Or wi www GAMMA oos Fr cl VR AS gn ines hess Al k bale amc roa re ve la d i gani tx leaks CHECK FLUID LEVELS ANDPIL II at vicit es Oo l re tie oo i elem eas demas 080 prat same ee E E ae ks aM balla rt NA presa poni A webs fj vh divi aala bows E apps SRL TATI bru or sad var 3 m Xen ran mi ubica 5 eodd L1 L pp 3j Mis eder bnga Lm sigas Sinir al Health Ola pad O ODE m tea ram an LJ I EJCOE mrar stt bele cman PA Bide Lig m ar EE j imm E Bv vaca vi Des D sa ERUNT fm notar cona O DID noon s ors serme ea 7 T L ES nion xt term rare 7 IET EPIO mim n uem m O ET WI re zl C1 Comat Service Advisor Customer Signature Technician 12 X sm raas RN Fart Wwe mn play a apa ero Customer Capy dai 285 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG The following section contains the Normal Schedule This schedule is presented at specific mileage kilometer intervals with exceptions noted 286 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing
127. e accelerator pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Using speed control The speed controls are located on the steering wheel The following buttons work with speed control RESUME Press to resume a set speed SET Press to set a speed or to increase or decrease a set speed RESUME ON Press to turn the speed control on OFF Press to turn the speed control off Setting speed control 1 Press and release ON 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press and release SET 60 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The light will be displayed in the instrument cluster Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Disengaging speed conirol Press the brake pedal to disengage the speed control Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed Resuming a set speed Press and release RESUME This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed Increasing speed while using speed conirol To set a higher speed e Press and ho
128. e lubricants should be replaced every 3 000 miles 4 800 km or three months whichever occurs first The 3 000 mile 4 800 km lubricant change interval may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number F1TZ 19580 B or equivalent Add friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles refer to Maintenance product and specifications in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for details The axle lubricant should be changed anytime an axle has been submerged in water Police Taxi Livery vehicle axle maintenance Replace rear axle lubricant every 100 000 miles 160 000 km Rear axle lubricant change may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear lubricant meeting Ford specification WSLM2C192 A part number FITZ 19580 B or equivalent Add four ounces 118 ml of friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles The axle lubricant should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water California fuel filter replacement If vehicle is registered in California the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this main tenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life Ford Motor Company however urges you fo have all recommended maintenance se
129. e safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso 108 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and front outboard passenger Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To lower the shoulder belt height press the button and slide the height adjuster down To raise the height of the shoulder belt press the button and slide the height adjuster up Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts 109 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt
130. e the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education and training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca 130 2011 Town Ca
131. e to your authorized dealer to have the new key s programmed To program additional new unprogrammed key s repeat this procedure from Step 1 for each additional key PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The perimeter anti theft system will warn you in the event of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle If there is any potential perimeter anti theft problem with your vehicle ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting Arming the system When armed the perimeter alarm will notify you of an unauthorized entry When unauthorized entry occurs the system will flash the park lamps and will sound the horn The system is ready to arm whenever the key is out of the ignition Any of the following actions will arm the alarm system e Press the remote transmitter lock control one time to arm the system e Lock all doors using the keypad e Lock all doors using the interior power lock switch while the driver or passenger door is open and then closed e Lock all doors with the key in the key lock cylinder If all the closures doors trunk hood are closed the park lamps will flash once and the horn will chirp once when the on the remote entry transmitter is pressed a second time within five seconds If any closure is not properly closed the park lamps will not flash and the horn will chirp twice The system will wait 20 seconds after one of the above actions is performed before
132. e vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle 116 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front b seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active SN airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back PEN WARNING Front seating positions only If seating two adults and a child Ford recommends properly restraining the child in the center front seating position but only if doing so will not interfere with driving the vehicle This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment method for a child restraint If the child seat interferes with driving the vehicle and the child restraint is forward facing the child may be restrained in the passenger seat Move the seat as far rearward as possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the
133. e with the locking pin then by pushing a small tool through the access hole provided 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Ford Motor Company recommends that all front seat armrests should be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision to verify that the locking pin feature has not been damaged The front seat armrest must be replaced if either damage or improper operation is found Failure to replace a damaged front seat armrest may result in the armrest falling suddenly during a collision which could lead to serious injury Front storage armrest if equipped To gain access to the storage compartment in your armrest press the button on either the driver or a c passenger side to unlatch and open dune the lid Using the power lumbar support if equipped The power lumbar control is located on the front inboard side of the seat a Press the top side of the control to adjust firmness Press the bottom side of the control to adjust softness Adjusting the power front seats The controls for the power seats are located on the inside of each front door WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving 94 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a coll
134. e your vehicle serviced immediately Parking brake with auto release Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked To set the parking brake 1 Move the gearshift to P Park 2 Press pedal downward The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated when the ignition is turned to the on position BRAKE until the parking brake is fully released 184 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected Your vehicle has an automatic parking brake release To release the parking brake 1 Start the vehicle 2 Press the brake pedal 3 Move the gearshift from the P Park position to one of the forward gears the parking brake will not release automatically when you shift into reverse The brake pedal must remain pressed while the gearshift is moved If the parking brake fails to release after completing this procedure use the manual parking
135. ect frequency band tune to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns 11 On Off Volume Push to turn on off turn to adjust the volume levels Note With the ignition and audio system off you may press the volume control to momentarily view the clock 34 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 12 LOAD Press to load a CD When the system prompts you select a preset to load a CD in that particular slot Load the CD If you do not pick a slot the system will select the next available slot Available slots are indicated by small flashing indicators in the display Press and hold to autoload up to six discs Note Ensure that the system is ready to accept the CD and do not try to force the disc into the CD slot as damage could result 13 AM FM Press repeatedly to switch between AM FM1 FM2 mode 14 CD Press to enter CD mode Press CD and a preset to select a specific CD to play 15 SAT SAT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio Your vehicle may be equipped with Satellite ready capability The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 16 SHUF SCAN Press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop SHUF Shuffle Pres
136. ed within 10 seconds to proceed to the next RBDS mode The Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC recommend that FM radio broadcasters use RBDS technology to transmit information FM radio stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RBDS technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired FIND Program type Allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format Classic Country Info Jazz Oldies R amp B Religious Rock Soft Top 40 In FM mode with RBDS ON press MENU until the program type menu is displayed One of the various program types will appear Press SEL TEXT b to scroll through music types Press SEEK or SCAN to search for a station playing the reguested music category Show TYPE Selects between displaying the station s call letters or music format when RBDS is enabled Press and hold MENU until SHOW XX appears in the display Press lt Q SEL TEXT DB to select NAME or TYPE Compression Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press MENU until compression status is displayed Press SEL TEXT to enable the compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed 33 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Press lt Q SEL TEXT DB again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed When ac
137. en changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft9 part numbers in this chapter 263 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Changing the air filter element 1 Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover 2 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing 3 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 4 Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 6 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps 7 Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp Note Be sure the hinge features of the air filter cover to the air filter housing are fully engaged when reassembling the air filter assembly Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on
138. enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 192 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period
139. entify if your vehicle is an FFV it may be equipped with a yellow fuel cap with the text E85 Gasoline or check if there is a label on the fuel filler door 249 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor beer and wine It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn and sugar cane When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels a small amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use The resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is denatured with 296 to 596 gasoline and is suitable for automotive use During the summer season fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 8596 denatured ethanol Ed85 and 1596 unleaded gasoline The fuel ethanol has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power Winter blends may contain up to 75 denatured ethanol Ed75 and up to 2596 unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts Severely cold weather may require additional measures for reliable starting Refer to Starting in the Driving chapter Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline It corrodes some metals and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell break down or become brittle and crack especially when mixed with gasoline Special materials and procedures h
140. enuine Ford parts and service When planning your maintenance services consider your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your vehicle s needs Get the most from your service and maintenance visits There are a lot of reasons why visiting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership for all your service needs is a great way to help keep your vehicle running great Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient How s that for quality service 281 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Factory trained technicians Ford and Lincoln Mercury service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealerships stock Ford and Motorcraft branded replacement parts These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications and we stand behind them Parts installed at your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership carry a nationwide 12 months 12 000 mile 20 000 km parts and labor limited warranty Your dealer can give you details Value shopping for your vehicle s maintenance needs Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and light repair au
141. er 1 To program units with fixed code DIP switches you will need the garage door hand held transmitter paper and a pen or pencil 2 Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to right for all 8 to 12 switches Use the figure below When a switch is in the up on or position circle L When a switch is in the middle neutral or 0 position circle M When a switch is in the down off or position circle R io 1 34 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 fL TOW OE CTS 206 12 T124 Switch position B 3 4 5 T 10 11 12 Ta pepee fe ee see Down off or L left M middle R right 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 3 To input these positions into the Car2U system simultaneously press all three Car2U system e eo buttons for a few seconds and then release to put the device into programming mode The indicator lights will blink slowly Within 2 5 minutes enter your corresponding DIP switch settings from left to right into your Car2U system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the settings you circled 4 After inputting switch settings simultaneously press and release all three Car2U system buttons The indicator lights will turn on 5 Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the garage door O e O Immediately within 1 second release the button
142. er anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments and have attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash 139 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat to the tether anchor 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat For vehicles with adjustable head restraints route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position f Am 3 Open the tether anchor cover 4 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 5 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your chi
143. er wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles e To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park e After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift to a lower gear Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditions at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification Remember that regardless of the rear axle ube used do not tow a trailer for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles 800 km of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bo
144. eration e Rotate the thumbwheel fully to the right past detent to activate the dome lamp and all interior lamps e n order to turn off these lamps rotate the thumbwheel to the left AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer Vertical aim adjustment 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern 44 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood 4 On the wall or screen you will observe an area of high intensity light The top of the high intensity area should touch the horizontal reference line if not the beam will need to be adjusted To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjus
145. erature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 114 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AAAB C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asp
146. erfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or rep
147. ess and hold RESET until the timer resets System Check and Vehicle Feature Customization Press the SETUP button repeatedly to cycle the message center through the following features listed INFO RESET Press SELECT to select functions in the setup menu PRESS SELECT TO BEGIN SYSTEM CHECK When this message appears press SELECT and the message center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a status of the item if needed 20 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Note Some systems show a message only if a condition is present 1 OIL LIFE HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL 2 WASHER FLUID 3 AIR SUSPENSION if equipped 4 RECONFIGURABLE TELLTALES K FAILED RED FAILED AMBER 5 PARK AID if equipped SCREEN FORM Press SELECT to change the display e ODOMETER e SPEEDO TEXT SIZE Press SELECT to change the display text size e NORMAL e LARGE UNITS Displays the current units English or Metric Press SELECT to change the display units e ENGLISH e METRIC LANGUAGE Displays the current language selected Press SELECT to change the display language e ENGLISH e ESPANOL e FRANCAIS COMPASS The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy 21 2011 Town Car tow O
148. ety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Note The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle e Use only cable type chains offered by Ford Motor Company as an accessory or equivalent Using SAE class S or other conventional link type chains may cause damage to the vehicle s wheel house and or body Install chains securely verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h with tire cables on your vehicle e Drive cautiously If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and retighten the chains If this does not work remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle Remove the tire chains when they are no
149. features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park e The ignition switch is in the off position e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 113 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Turn the ignition switch to the on position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately one minute e Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt nine times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off e After Step 3 the restraint system warning light airbag light will be turned on for three seconds 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the s
150. front passenger airbag Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts Ensure the child is properly restrained in an appropriate child seat or with the use of a booster 117 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Driver and passenger airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue
151. front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled 120 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detec
152. g authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 218 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable t
153. g objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag Status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system In case there is a problem with the ee front passenger sensing system the 9 airbag readiness lamp in the TN instrument cluster will stay lit If the airbag readiness lamp is lit do the following The driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If objects are lodged and or cargo is interfering with the seat please take the following steps to remove the obstruction e Pull the vehicle over e Turn the vehicle off e Driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat e Remove the obstruction s if found Restart the vehicle e Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is no longer illuminated If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer 123 2011 Town Ca
154. g the hub e Remove loose labels before inserting tapes e Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat humidity or cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing e Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 12 hours of play to maintain good sound operation Don t e Expose tapes to direct sunlight extreme humidity heat or cold e Leave tapesin the cassette player for a long time when not being played 36 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface e nspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Dirty warped or damaged CDs irregular shaped CDs CDs with a scratch protection film attached and CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ba
155. ger seat forward or backward using the control located in the rear center console With the ignition is in the accessory position move the control forward or backward to move the front passenger seat Remote seat adjustment lockout The window lockout control located on the drivers door will also lockout the remote seat adjustment To lock out the remote seat adjustment feature press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the remote seat adjustment control Rear console radio climate controls if equipped Refer to the Entertainment Systems and Climate Controls chapters for operation instructions 56 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first detent and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close One touch down Allows the driver s window to open fully without holding the control down Press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly
156. gine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in Overdrive or Drive e Press the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear If necessary try turning the traction control system off This will allow the wheels to spin which may help to free your stuck vehicle For more information refer to Traction control in this chapter Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat 191 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom 4 of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may
157. gt Check Fuel Cap E LE ings 1 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 11 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned on to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on board diagnostics system OBD IT has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your c
158. h For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 229 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e f a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WAR
159. h ATL rh Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS AII Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 157 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety
160. halt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 146 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of m on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum reguired by aw WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e T
161. he coolant concentration above 60 e A coolant concentration of 6096 will provide freeze point protection down to 62 F 52 C Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e f available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 4096 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 4096 e A coolant concentration of 4096 will provide freeze point protection down to 12 F 24 C Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e If available refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection What you should know about fail safe cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component da
162. he dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All wheel driving capability if applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack 204 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Full size matching
163. he limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper use a load carrying hitch You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 1596 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue 173 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a c
164. he on position The fuel en gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade E The arrow near the fuel pump icon indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information MESSAGE CENTER With the ignition in the on position the message center located on your instrument cluster displays important vehicle information through a constant monitor of vehicle systems You may select NU 000000 0 mi display features on the message i center for a display of status The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long indicator chime DE 5g A NU D00000 0 mi v9 v E NU 000000 0 mi Your display can show up to three reconfigurable telltales at one time What ever is displayed in the top left corner has the highest priority Premium Display Severity Indicator located under the message center Indicates severity of the information being displayed on the premium display Red for high severity amber for medium severity and non lit for information only For example a door ajar warning would be accompanied by a red indicator low fuel by an amber indicator and fuel economy by an absence of the indicator The indicator always illuminates with the highest severity rating of the warnings displayed 18 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Pri
165. hts see your authorized dealer For vehicles with HID lamps see your authorized dealer for service When replacing the center high mount stop lamp assembly see your authorized dealer for service Replacing interior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing rear courtesy reading lamps To replace the rear courtesy reading lamp bulbs in the rear assist handle 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position o 2 Under the handle remove two eee trim screw covers retaining screws ee p mRNA lamp assembly and assist handle n KOS from the headliner iz ZA gt d 3 Disconnect the electrical connector from the lamp assembly 4 Remove the two screws on the lamp assembly 5 Pull the bulb straight out To complete installation follow the removal procedure in reverse order Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently 48 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Replacing headlamp bulbs To remove the headlamp bulb 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Remove the three retainers on top of the radiator cover and the two retainers in front of the radiator cover 3 Remove the three bolts for each headlamp 4 Press the retainer next to the vertical aim adjuster then pull the headlamp assembly forward and disconnect the electrical connector 5
166. icle disarms the vehicle and allows the engine to start The indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If the indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly have the system serviced by your authorized dealer or a qualified technician Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed 86 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare keys You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin Tips e A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle e Only use SecuriLock keys e You must have two previously programmed coded keys keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible e f no previously programmed coded keys are available you must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key s programmed 1 Insert a previously programmed 3 coded key
167. icle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is ONLY meant for changing the tire e Never use the rear differential as a jacking point 4 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 5 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 6 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 7 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification 8 Put flat tire jack and lug wrench away Be sure to stow the jack properly in the holder bracket 9 Turn on the air suspension switch WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque ft lb Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners 210 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the s
168. in the front seat e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time Note When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated the passenger seat mounted side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel to the right of the radio Note The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional When the front passenger seat is not occupied empty seat or in the event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate the indicator lamp will be unlit The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected e When the
169. in a holder bracket on the right hand side next to the wheel well WARNING On vehicles equipped with air suspension turn off the air suspension switch prior to jacking hoisting or towing your vehicle Refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter for more information 4 Remove the lug wrench A from the jack Rotate the lug wrench socket out from the handle Tire change procedure Roadside Emergencies WARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the vehicle is in P Park 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus 207 Roadside Emergencies WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Block the diagonally opposite wheel 2 Locate pry off notch if A equipped and remove the cen
170. in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 thrown clear times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH 112 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s airbag system One time disable If at any time the driver front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles the safety belt for that seating position the Belt Minder is disabled for the current ignition cycle The Belt Minder feature will enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds Confirmation is not given for the one time disable Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Minder are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure Note The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features must be disabled enabled separately Both cannot be disabled enabled during the same key cycle The driver and front passenger Belt Minder
171. in the autolamp position the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off 53 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls TILT STEERING WHEEL To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you 2 Move the steering wheel up or down until you find the desired location 3 Release the steering wheel release control This will lock the steering wheel in position WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamps Slide on rod feature if equipped Rotate the visor towards the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner visor must be retracted before moving it back towards the windshield 54 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls CLOCK Press the right control to move the time display forward Press the left control to move the time display backward AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12V DC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cau
172. in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components 236 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass Turn the blade as much as possible to gain access to the lock tab A Using a skinny tool press the lock tab to release 7 the blade from the arm loop and pull the blade from the arm 2 Attach the new blade to the arm A loop and pull it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element ENGINE OIL 9 amp 7 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait up to 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 237 2011 Town Car
173. in use use This includes the optional full sized matching wheel and tire Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly inflated and malfunction your spare tire is not in use and the light remains on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer 164 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low tire Possible Customer action required pressure cause warning light Flashing warning Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use This includes the optional full sized matching wheel and tire Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly inflated and malfunction your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes have the system inspected by your authorized dealer When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 32 km h
174. inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 158 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 159 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T
175. installed Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter CHECK AIR SUSPENSION Displayed when the air suspension system is not operating properly If this message is displayed while driving pull off the road as soon as safely possible For more information refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter AIR SUSP OFF Displayed when the air suspension system is turned off For more information refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition Warning message can be reset by pressing the RESET button but will return after 10 minutes If any other button is pressed besides RESET the message PRESS RESET TO CLEAR will appear in the message center Once this message disappears after approximately two seconds press RESET to clear the warning TRUNK AJAR Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed OVERDRIVE OFF Displayed when the overdrive is disabled OVERDRIVE ON Displayed when the overdrive is enabled LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon
176. into the ignition 2 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep O the ignition in the 3 on position 4 for at least one second but no more e than 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the coded key from the ignition 4 After three seconds but within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key insert the other previously programmed coded key into the ignition 5 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least one second but not more than 10 seconds 6 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the second key from the ignition 7 Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key insert the unprogrammed key new valet key into the ignition 8 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least one second 87 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security 9 Your new unprogrammed key is now programmed If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If the key was not successfully programmed it will not start your vehicle s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off rapidly If failure repeats bring your vehicl
177. ions are time sensitive If you do not follow the time sensitive actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter e NZ 1 Firmly press the two outer Car2U system buttons for 1 2 seconds then release 64 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls 2 Go to the garage to locate the garage door opener motor and its learn button You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the unit s cover or light lens to locate the learn button Press the learn button after which you will have 10 30 seconds to return to your vehicle and complete the following steps If you cannot locate the learn button refer to the Owner s Guide of your garage door opener or call the toll free Car2U9 system help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 3 Return to your vehicle Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the O O O garage door You may need to hold the button from 5 20 seconds during which time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves When the button is released the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete
178. ire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code e Inflation pressure measure of the amount of air in a tire e Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 37 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires 147 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the
179. is chapter Easy access easy out feature if equipped This feature automatically moves the driver s seat rearward 2 in 5 cm when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the key is removed from the ignition The seat will move forward to the original position when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the key is placed in the ignition Seat mounted cup holders if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with cupholders in the cushion of the front center seat and the rear seat The rear seat cupholder is designed to over rotate from the seat when subjected to a heavy load The rear seat cupholder can be reset by rotating to the closed position 98 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision Memory seats outside rear view mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat Ft adjustable pedals and outside rear is view mirrors to two programmable positions The memory seat control is located on the driver door e To program position one move the driver seat to the desired position using the seat controls Press the SET control The SET control indicator light will briefly illuminate While the light is illuminated press control 1 e To program position two repeat the previous procedure using contr
180. ision or sudden stop WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket if equipped when a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if equipped Check the passenger airbag Off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Refer to Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section for additional details Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system Press the control to recline the seatback forward or backward 95 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press to move the seat forward or backward Press to move the front po
181. ithout access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 216 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other p
182. ition run cycle While the ignition is in the on position activating the high or low heated seat switch enables heating mode When activated they will turn off automatically when the ignition is turned to the off position 97 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been activated Rear heated seats if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door panels and operate like the front heated seats Refer to the Heated Seats section in th
183. k or other engine components 226 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A e Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e l or routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 227 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and
184. l AUTOSET appears in the display Press lt SEL TEXT P to turn ON or OFF When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets Speed sensitive volume Radio volume changes automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Press MENU to access and lt Q SEL TEXTP to adjust the volume setting The level will appear in the display 28 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Dolby Works in tape mode to reduces tape noise and hiss Press MENU until DOLBY XX appears in the display Press SEL TEXT to turn ON or OFF The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Armrest if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with Rear Seat Audio controls this feature will be listed in Menu mode Press 4 SEL TEXT Bp to turn ON or OFF When the feature is turned ON rear seat passengers can adjust the settings of the front audio stem For further information refer to Rear Console Audio Controls 4f equipped later in this chapter Note The menu selections will remain in the
185. l car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 276 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings e Sp
186. l or medium objects placed on the seat cushion For most objects that are in the front passenger seat the passenger airbag will be disabled Even though the passenger airbag is disabled the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated according to the table below Small i e three ring EX bottled water Medium i e heavy Disabled briefcase fully packed luggage Empty seat or small Lit Disabled to medium object with safety belt buckled If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion and the center console if equipped e Objects hanging off the seat back e Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket if equipped e Objects placed on the occupant s lap e Cargo interference with the seat 122 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat e Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket if equipped or han
187. lable at the King Ranch Saddle Shop Visit the website at www krsaddleshop com or telephone in the United States 1 800 282 KING 5464 If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner use another premium leather conditioner e Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section e Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel sized amount of conditioner to a clean dry cloth e Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears Allow the conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior If a film appears wipe off film with a dry clean cloth UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt 231 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft
188. laced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail 150 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm za 24 When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the
189. larm You may also deactivate the alarm in the following ways e Turn the ignition to the on or start positions e Wait two minutes and 45 seconds for the alarm to time out 78 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Memory seat mirrors adjustable pedals feature if equipped The remote keyless entry system can also control the memory seats mirrors adjustable pedals feature With this feature the first two programmed transmitters will recall a different memory position Press C once to unlock the driver s door and move the memory features to the corresponding memory position just as if you had pressed the memory control in the vehicle Activating the memory seat mirrors adjustable pedals feature To activate this feature 1 Position the seat mirrors and adjustable pedals to the position desired 2 Press the SET control on the driver s door panel 3 Within five seconds press one control on the remote transmitter and then press the 1 or 2 button on the driver s door panel to which you would like to associate with the memory positions and Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions 4 Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired Deactivating the memory seat mirrors adjustable pedals feature To deactivate this feature 1 Press the SET control on the driver s door panel 2 Within five seconds press one control on the remote transmi
190. ld SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap up function Press and release SET to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and release SET 4 Reducing speed while using speed control To reduce a set speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap down function Press and release SET to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments e Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then press the SET Turning off speed control To turn off the speed control press OFF or turn off the ignition Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased 61 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED Audio control features NEXT Press to select the next preset radio station tape selection or CD track VOL Volume Press to increase or decrease the volume Climate control features if equipped TEMP Press to increase or decrease the interior temperature UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a universal garage door opener which can be used to replace the common hand held transmitter Car
191. ld restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use 140 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slo
192. le dual temperature 5 control Allows the driver to have full control of the cabin temperature settings single zone or allows the passenger to have control of their individual temperature settings dual zone Press to turn on dual zone mode press again to return to single zone 6 G7 Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and the side window demisters 7 B Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents the side window demisters and floor vents 8 A Distributes air through the floor vents 9 J Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents 10 A Distributes air through the instrument panel vents Manual override controls Allows you to manually determine where airflow is directed To return to fully automatic control press AUTO 11 OFF Outside air is shut out and o the fan will not operate 12 AUTO Press and select the puro desired temperature The system will automatically determine the fan speed airflow location A C on or off outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to the selected temperature If unusual conditions exist G e window fogging etc manual overrides allow you to select airflow locations and fan speed 13 Driver s side temperature control Controls the temperature on the driver side of the vehicle 14 Fan Speed Used to manually enable or disable the fan speed To p return to automatic fan operati
193. le s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 1096 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy e dling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel e Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy e Slow down gradually e Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 1596 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy e Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy e You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy 256 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy e Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may re
194. le sensitive emergency locking mode 107 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING After any vehicle collision the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy management feature e This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision e The energy management feature is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611C22 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as th
195. le switch Heated seat modules LOM interior lighting 19 7 5A Driver s door module DDM switches PDM Power mirrors Driver seat module DSM DDM PATS LED 24 15A LCM High beams Multi function switch Flash to pass DATC module Cluster 198 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies tecum Rating pf I NNNM Not used 28 75A Brakesigna LCM BTSD ABS Not used 39 Not used Bo Not used LOM Key in 8 NBA Delay accessory audi 339 Ko Delyedaccessory Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 199 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 503 206 502 304 209 501 208 205 24 303 207
196. leather which is extremely durable but still requires special care and maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort 230 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the leather Cleaning For dirt use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean damp cloth or soft brush For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution e Clean spills as quickly as possible e Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather e Do not spill coffee ketchup mustard orange juice or oil based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl or plastics Scratches Natural Markings Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings such as small scars These markings give character to the seating covers and should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioning section Conditioning Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are avai
197. ll Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 152 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate a
198. ll your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of 221 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Africa U S Virgin Islands Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 FAX 313 390 0804 Email exp
199. llowing gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 Ib 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 Ib 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1 400 1 100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 240 Ib No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the 172 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and
200. llpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician 37 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls DUAL ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DEATC SYSTEM 1 A C control Cools the vehicle and is used to reduce humidity in the vehicle Press to turn on off The A C control engages automatically in AUTO MS and S modes 2 Recirculation control Cools the vehicle more quickly by recirculating the cabin air instead of using outside air and helps prevent unpleasant outside odors or fumes from entering the vehicle Press to turn on off in all modes except GV Recirculation may turn off automatically to reduce fogging potential 3 Passenger side temperature control Controls the temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle when in dual zone mode To enter dual zone press the passenger temperature control or DUAL The passenger temperature will appear in the display c 4 Rear defroster control Removes ice and fog from the rear window Press to turn on off Refer to the rear window defrost section for more information 38 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls 5 DUAL Sing
201. lso create your own 5 digit personal entry code When pressing the controls on the keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation Programming a personal entry code To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 Enter a sixth digit to indicate which personality feature should be recalled by the personal code e e 2 recalls driver personality 1 e 3 e 4 recalls driver personality 2 eb5be6 7e8and 9 e 0 do not recall a driver personality All of the vehicle doors will lock and unlock to confirm programming of the new code Each driver personality profile personality 1 or personality 2 can be associated with only one personal code The factory set code cannot be associated with a personality code You can program up to three personal codes to unlock your vehicle These codes do not replace the permanent code that was provided by your authorized dealer 82 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Tips for setting codes e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order Erasing personal codes 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code The keyless entry keypad and interior lights will illuminate and the driver s door will unlock 2 Pre
202. mage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain 246 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the H hot area e The m symbol will display in the message center e The message center will display COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE e A chime will sound The service engine soon X Y indicator light will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting d
203. mation e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic directions and Information privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Note Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the f
204. mbly To replace any of the bulbs follow this procedure 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Remove the retainers and the radiator cover 3 Remove the bolts then pull the headlamp assembly forward and disconnect the electrical connector 4 Remove the three screws and protective bulb cover from the a headlamp assembly x 5 Rotate the bulb socket V ele counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 6 Carefully pull bulb straight out of N 3S the socket and push in the new bulb until it snaps locking it into K position 7 To complete installation follow the removal procedure in reverse order Note To ensure a good seal attach the bulb cover and partially tighten the screws Check to ensure the gasket is fully centered Finish tightening the screws in a criss cross pattern upper left lower right etc Replacing tail lamp brake turn lamp bulbs The tail lamp the brake lamp and the turn signal lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp assembly Follow the same steps to replace these bulbs 50 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the trunk and remove the retainer 2 Carefully pull the carpet away to expose the lamp assembly hardware 3 Remove the three nut and washer assemblies then pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle 4
205. metere 42 see Motorcraft parts 267 headlamps flash to pass 43 Datis instrument panel dimming 44 O Passenger Occupant interior lamps 46 48 Classification Sensor 101 replacing bulbs 49 Pedals see Power adjustable LATCH anchors 136 foot pedals sss siiri msi 60 Lights warning and indicator 12 Power adjustable foot pedals 60 anti lock brakes ABS 184 HER he Power distribution box Load b A cece 166 see Fuses inn 199 Locks childproof i PONET heteisgasefide do dOOPSOL x cep e SD INS 72 Power mirrors 58 Lubricant specifications 268 Power point 55 Lug nuts esee ete 210 Power steering 186 Lumbar support seats 94 fluid checking and adding 260 fluid refill capacity 268 M Power trunk 69 70 Message center 18 19 PowerWindows 57 english metric button 22 23 system check button 22 R warning messages 23 iru MEM we D7 b8 Radio ME 26 31 automatic dimming rearview Rear window defroster 41 METO PNE 58 R dati f fold AWAY icut a meets 59 bic aA Se TOT attaching safety restraints for heated susce ete ailemi 59 hild 129 programmable memo
206. monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunc
207. mum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned 241 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected e Always dispose of automotive din batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized S Y standards for disposal Call your 4 local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and le
208. n disabled the OFF will be illuminated on the switch The traction control system will automatically turn on every time the ignition is turned to off and on If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road surface try switching the traction control system off This may allow excess wheel spin to dig the vehicle out and enable a successful rocking maneuver Remember to switch the traction control system back on once the vehicle is no longer stuck If a system fault is detected the traction control active light will illuminate the traction control button will not turn the system on or off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running 186 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving It is also important to maintain a proper power steering fluid level in the power steering fluid reservoir e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level See Power steering fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fl
209. n does not require any action by the driver TRACTION LOK AXLE IF EQUIPPED This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface Under normal conditions the traction lok axle functions like a standard rear axle The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brake lamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter If the fuse is not blown perform the following procedure 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition to accessory 188 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving 2 Locate the access plug on the underside of the steering column cover 3 Remove the access plug using a flat head screwdriver then press and hold the override button using a flat head screwdriver With the key in the on position apply the brake pedal and shift the transmission into N Neutral while continuing to press the override bu
210. n the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel e When the ignition is in the off position the indicator will flash once every two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate normal system functionality If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position If this occurs turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no electronic interference with the programmed key If the vehicle doesn t start try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful contact your authorized dealership for key replacement If the indicator still flashes rapidly or glows steadily the vehicle will not start contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off position The theft indicator will flash every two seconds when the vehicle is armed Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key programmed to your veh
211. n this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the
212. nal remote entry transmitters you can either reprogram them yourself or take all remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters You must have all remote entry transmitters maximum of four available before beginning this procedure Note Do not depress the brake pedal at any time during this procedure If the brake pedal is pressed at any time during this procedure programming mode will be exited and the entire procedure must be repeated 80 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Note Ensure the brake pedal is not G pressed during this sequence To reprogram the remote entry transmitters 2 1 Ensure the vehicle is e 4 electronically unlocked 2 Put the key in the ignition 3 Cycle eight times rapidly within 10 seconds between the 1 off position and the 3 on position Note The eighth turn must end in the 3 on position 4 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been activated 5 Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter Note If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure over again 6 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that this remote entry transmitter has been programmed 7 Repeat Step 5 to program each additional remote entry transmitter 8 Turn the ignition to the 1 off posi
213. nd depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 132 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 nsert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 133 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the bel
214. nd try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 138 kPa greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 3 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 138 kPa greater than the maximum pressure an authorized dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 3 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system if equipped If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged if equipped Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do
215. ndividually elect to use RBDS technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired FIND Program type Allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for certain category of music format Classic Country Info Jazz Oldies R amp B Religious Rock Soft Top 40 With RBDS ON press MENU until the program type menu is displayed One of the various program types will appear Press lt q SEL TEXT P to scroll through music types Press SEEK or SCAN to search for a station playing the requested music category Show TYPE Selects between displaying the station s call letters or music format when RBDS is enabled Press MENU until SHOW XX appears in the display Press lt q SEL TEXT gt to select NAME or TYPE Compression Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press MENU repeatedly until COMP compression is displayed Press SEL TEXT to enable the compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed Press lt Q SEL TEXT BD again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed When activated the compression icon will appear in the display Occupancy mode if equipped Press MENU repeatedly until occupancy mode appears in the display Press a SEL TEXT to select ALL DRIVER or REAR SEAT occupancy mode Autoset Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FMI FM2 Press MENU repeatedly unti
216. necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted 144 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter 145 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temp
217. ng pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your pr
218. ngine starts Excessive cranking could damage the starter Note If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try turn the key to OFF wait 10 seconds and try again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try again this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Cold weather starting flexible fuel vehicles only The starting characteristics of all grades of Egs ethanol make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol As the outside temperature approaches freezing ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade ethanol same as with unleaded gasoline If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions 0 F to 32 F 18 C to 0 C you may experience increased cranking times rough idle or hesitation until the engine has warmed up 179 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is cold when operating on Egs ethanol Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter damage may occur If the engine fails to start turn the key to off and wait 30 seconds before trying again Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine
219. nications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices text messaging devices and portable two way radios 8 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Introduction WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard
220. ns completely before attempting to program the Car2U system Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist you in programming the transmitter Additional Car2U9 system information can be found on line at www learcar2U com or by calling the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 572 2728 Types of garage door openers rolling code and fixed code The Car2U Home Automation System may be programmed to operate rolling code and fixed code garage door openers e Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are code protected Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every time your remote control garage door opener is used e Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996 Fixed code uses the same coded signal every time It is manually programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code 63 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls If you do not know if your garage door opener is a rolling code or fixed code device open your garage door opener s remote control battery cover If a panel of DIP switches is present your garage door opener is a fixed code device If not your garage door opener is a rolling code device Rolling code programming Note Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves time sensitive actions Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so you will know which act
221. nting USA fus Instrument Cluster Info Information menu Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following features listed SETUP SELECT Press the RESET button reset functions in the information menu TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press and release INFO button until the A or B trip appears in the display this represents the trip mode Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to reset Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to English MILES km TO EMPTY This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display FUEL LEVEL LOW and sound a tone for one second when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you RESET this warning message this display and tone will return within 10 minutes or 10 miles 16 km DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected AVERAGE FUEL XX X MPG L 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km
222. nty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b You are also required to use BBB AUTO 219 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C sec 2301 et seq If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b or the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation and if your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbit
223. o not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 233 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the instrument panel 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located in the grille 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open KY 234 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Automatic transmission fluid dipstick Brake fl
224. o obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter 245 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 5096 e NEVER increase t
225. o repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 You are required to submit your warra
226. oad for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 167 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Example only e TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL5 FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE me e movere sec OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL SPARE T145 80D16 420 KPA 60 PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TFRONT p RER g NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 5 AVANT 1 ARRIERE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 492 kg or Le poids total des occupants et du chargement na doit jamais d pesser kg ou
227. of factory installed equipment your engine block heater will use 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block heater operation longer than three hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Your service brakes are self adjusting Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for scheduled maintenance Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a performance concern with the vehicle s brake system In normal operation automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied Such noises are usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning however they may be heard at any time while braking and can be aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold heat moisture road dust salt or mud If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present while braking the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Warning lights and
228. of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly Using the manual recline function if equipped WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop 92 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision To adjust the front seatback using the manual recliner e Lift and hold the handle located on the side of the seat e Lean against the seatback to adjust it to your desired position You can recline the seat back or bring it forward e Release the handle when the desired position has been reached Front seat armrest The front seat armrest has a locking pin which prevents the armrest from folding down during a collision If the locking pin has engaged because of a substantial jolt but no collision has occurred you can disengage the locking pin by first moving the armrest forward until it stops to align the hol
229. oit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company 223 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to Attp www safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http w
230. ol A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park A memory seat position may be programmed at any time The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter cJ unlock control To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter refer to Remote entry system in the Locks amd Security chapter SAFETY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System M The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of the following items e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors and safety belt usage sensors 99 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Driver s seat position sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp e Front crash severity sensor e Restraints Control Module RCM with impact and safing sensors e hestraint system warning light and back up tone e The electrical wiring for the ai
231. ollision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing and don t make full throttle starts e Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades e Use a lower gear to eliminate excessive shifting and assist in transmission cooling For additional information refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached anticipate stops and brake gradually 174 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to Special operating conditions in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter Trailer towing tips e Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trail
232. om the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 214 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure If equipped with an air suspension system the air suspension control in the luggage compartment must be turned to the off position before your vehicle can be towed If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle 215 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle w
233. on press AUTO 39 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls temperature It will remain displayed until the EXT control is pressed again The external temperature will be most accurate when the vehicle has been moving for a period of time 15 EXT Displays the outside air c 16 Temperature conversion Press to switch between Fahrenheit Fe and Celsius temperature on the DEATC display only The set point temperatures in Celsius will be displayed in half degree increments Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 7 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the recirculation control on or the system turned off e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the air distribution setting that is selected During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C with selected reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle
234. on refer to Interior trunk control in the Driver Controls chapter POWER DOOR LOCKS e Press the control to unlock all doors e Press the control to lock all doors Power door trim switch inhibit This feature disables the power door locks and trunk interior release switches if all doors are closed and the perimeter alarm becomes armed Once the power door trim switches are disabled they can only become active when perimeter alarm is disarmed Smart locks With the key in the ignition in any switch position and either the driver s or passenger s door open the doors cannot be locked using the power door lock switches Central locking unlocking e All doors are locked when the key is inserted into the driver door key cylinder and turned to the lock position e The driver s door is unlocked when the key is inserted into the driver door key cylinder and turned to the unlock position e If the key is turned a second time to the unlock position within five seconds all vehicle doors will unlock 72 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security Autolock This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the following conditions are met e all the doors are closed e the engine is running e you shift into gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle s speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h Autorelock The autolock feature repeats when e a door is opened and
235. onds until the indicator lights begin to blink rapidly The indicator lights are located directly above the buttons 2 Once the indicator lights begin to SZ blink release your fingers from the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U system it is recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance The Car2U system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes and modifications to the Car2U system transmitter by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the equipment POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT WARNING Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the brake pedals 68 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Position the floor mat so that the A eyelet is over the pointed end of the ci retention post and rotate forward to lock in Make sure that the mat does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator or the brake pedal To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure PO
236. onship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation ca
237. ontrol and personal injury 170 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 1596 conventional trailer and driver only 150 Ib 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limita
238. oon Y indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened See Fuel filler cap in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon C indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the service engine soon C indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon CY indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control 259 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st
239. or added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used 239 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability WAR
240. ord Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 km To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 or visit our website at www ford ca HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher is located on the steering column just behind the steering wheel The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in Y any position or if the key is not in the ignition A Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will mE flash Press the flasher control again Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH E The fuel pump shut off switch is a device intended to stop the electric fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt After a collision if the engine cranks but does not start the fuel pump shut off switch may have been activated 194 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies The fuel pump shut off switch is located on a bracket inside of the luggage compartment Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut off s
241. ory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Lincoln Custom Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty Following is a list of several Lincoln Custom Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models To find out what accessories are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www lincolnaccessories com Exterior style eSide deflectors Interior style eFloor mats Lifestyle e Cargo organization and e Garmin navigation management Peace of mind eRemote start e Windshield wiper shaker e Vehicle security systems e Back up camera e Wheel locks e Back up alarm e Vehicle tracking and recovery Ford Licensed Accessories FLA are warranted by the accessory manufacturer s warranty Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed 274 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Accessories and developed by the accessory manufacturer and ha
242. ould be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest Lap belts Adjusting the front center seat lap belt if equipped WARNING The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips not across the waist The lap belt does not adjust Ww automatically Insert the tongue into T d the correct buckle the buckle 7 closest to the direction the tongue is coming from To lengthen the belt turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle To tighten the belt pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips 105 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use Safety belt locking modes The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first locking mode and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help red
243. ould be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming P Pd from until you hear a snap and feel A it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle iN JA D y 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle QUT ud N AC 104 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Restraint of pregnant women WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also follow this practice See figure below Pregnant women should always wear their safety belt The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt sh
244. ouns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace 302 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours Miteace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miteace A ABS see Brakes 183 Accessory delay 57 Air cleaner filter 263 264 267 Airsuspension 187 description 187 Airbag supplemental restraint SYSTEM i isses rene nere 114 115 124 and child safety seats 117 description zsigeri 115 124 disposal serana tr RE een 127 driver airbag 118 125 indicator light 124 126 Operation S eerte ote e etra 118 125 passenger airbag 118 125 side airbag 4o eei oret 124 Antifreeze see Engine coolant 242 Anti lock brake system see Brakes 183 Anti theft system 84 88 arming the system 88 disarming a triggered SYSTE iiec ccc oe er dtes 89 Audio system see Radio 26 31 Automatic transmission driving an automatic OVerdrive iskana 189 fluid adding sss 261
245. our vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the service engine soon CY indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may
246. ovincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 127 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children gt Recommended eg Child size height weight or age sence TB Infants or Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or less generally age four or younger Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg and upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt positioning booster seat generally children who are at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or greater than 80 Ib 36 kg or 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by child restraint manufacturer Use a child safety seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Use a belt positioning booster seat Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips
247. own automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low WARNING Fail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power power steering assist and power brake assist which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury 247 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL FILTER For fuel filter replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter Replace the fuel filter with an authorized
248. pliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO 1 DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG that a Safety Comp liance FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLI Certification Label be affixed to a XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH 5 T XXXXIXXXXXXX TIRES XXXXIXXXXXXX TIRES vehicle and prescribe where the OXX FMS OOK RIMS Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX KPAX CPSLOOLD J AT XXX KPaX PSI COLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR li ification Labela VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN Compliance Certification abe 1S EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE located on the structure B Pillar Ky ae ee by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s A 1 UT IHE DELE door EXT PNT XX RCXX D90 WB BRK INTTR PPS TR TANE TR SPROUXXXXX XX X XX X XX XX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX _XXXX XXXXXXX XX Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 272 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX
249. position 4 Press the power door unlock control three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position 6 The door locks will lock unlock to confirm programming mode is entered active 7 With the ignition still in the on position for the autolock feature press the unlock control once then press the lock control once The horn will chirp once to confirm successful programming For the autounlock feature press the lock control once then press the unlock control once The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated If any door the hood or the deck lid is open the horn will chirp twice and the procedure will need to be performed again 8 After having waited the necessary time for the programming to confirm turn the ignition to the off position Once disabled the autolock autounlock feature can be enabled by repeating the procedure in Steps 1 8 CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS e When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside e The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the childproof door locks are set but the doors are unlocked The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock 74 2011 Town Car tow Owner
250. quired Replace engine air filter Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Rotate tires inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth Every 5 000 miles 8 000 km or Change engine oil and replace oil filter 6 months Inspect and lubricate U joints Every 15 000 miles 24 000 km Replace fuel filter Crown Victoria Grand Marquis and Town Car Every 30 000 miles 48 000 km Change automatic transmission fluid except 6R80 transmission Every 50 000 miles 80 000 km Change manual transmission fluid Exclusive use of E85 Flex Fuel Vehicles only Every oil change interval f ran exclusively on 85 fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel 297 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Special operating condition log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours Miveace DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Hours MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Come Houns MiLEAGE 298 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cop
251. r tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter e Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the
252. r tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center seating position WARNING An out of position front center occupant could affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance section of this Owner s Guide WARNING Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights amd chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either e flash or stay lit 9 e The readiness light will not N illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properl
253. racks on the current CD in random order Press again to stop 15 Memory presets To set a mF station Select frequency band tune eS to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns 16 AM FM Press to switch 7 between AM FMI FM2 modes SCAN 17 Tape eject Press to eject the tape 18 CD TAPE Press to switch between CD and TAPE mode In radio mode the CD icon will appear in the display if a CD is loaded into the system 19 SAT Your system may be EE equipped with Satellite Ready capability The kit to enable the Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer Detailed satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit Check with your authorized dealer for availability 20 On Off Volume Press to turn on and off turn to adjust the Oo volume levels 30 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Premium plus AM FM Stereo In dash Six CD sound system E souno oO E T j2 3174 Ce ew e Lr e 40 WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with
254. raps later in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position 136 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seatback
255. rator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB You are not bound by the decision and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute and decision are admissible in the court action Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford is then bound by the decision and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 220 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Customer Assistance BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relati
256. rbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor and indicator lights How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints control module RCM During a crash the RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more common moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to
257. re the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly 244 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions t
258. ress it again to close You can render the switch inoperable by locking the button with your master key The remote trunk release control and power door locks will be disabled when the vehicle perimeter alarm system is armed This control will not work until the vehicle perimeter alarm system is disarmed Refer to Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and Security chapter FUEL DOOR RELEASE Your vehicle is equipped with a locking fuel door To open the door N press the control located on the door 3 70 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Fuel filler door override release If the remote release is inoperative open the trunk then pull the override release handle located inside the trunk to open the fuel filler door 71 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS Your vehicle is equipped with a master key and a valet identified with the word VALET key lock system e The master key will access the vehicle s doors trunk glove box ignition and remote trunk release e The valet key will access doors and ignition only Before using the valet key with an attendant lock the interior trunk control to disable the interior trunk control located on the drivers door then lock the glove compartment with your master key Do not hand over the remote entry transmitter or the master key to the valet attendant For more informati
259. results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 255 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added in gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehic
260. rical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 215 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS U S ONLY More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for renta
261. rket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 3 8L may be required e The service engine soon C indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon C indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter 254 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA
262. ront passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section of this chapter 101 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage Front safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in side collisions This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy management feature section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses
263. rtion of the seat cushion up or down Press to move the rear portion of the seat cushion up or down 96 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Heated seats if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The heated seat control is located on the driver s or front passenger s door To operate the heated seats e Press the indicated side of the control for maximum heat e Press again to deactivate e Press the indicated side of the control for minimum heat e Press again to deactivate The heated seat module resets at every ign
264. rvices performed at the specified inter vals and to record all vehicle service Hot climate oil change intervals If operating conditions are normal and you drive your Ford Lincoln or Mercury vehicle under typical everyday conditions and you are using an API performance category oil of SL or later for example SM etc then you can follow the 7 500 mile 12 000 km normal service oil change intervals schedule Vehicles operating in the Middle East North Africa Sub Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates must follow the oil change interval of 3 000 mile 5 000 km if the owner is using oils defined by the American Petroleum Institute API performance category of API SK or earlier for ex ample SJ efc Engine air filter amp cabin air filter replacement Engine air filter and cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter 300 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide COOLANT CHANGE RECORD change coolant whichever comes first 301 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Engine coolant change log DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE DEALER VALIDATION P amp A Cope H
265. ry 79 el gile kei Gi e eim side view mirrors power 58 Relays icit nete 195 Motorcraft parts 232 248 267 Remote entry system 76 illuminated entry 8l O locking unlocking doors 77 opening the trunk 78 Octane rating 253 panic alarm 78 306 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus replacement additional transmitters 3 seo creo teta 80 replacing the batteries 79 Roadside assistance 193 S Safety belts see Safety restraints 99 103 104 106 108 109 Safety Canopy 124 Safety defects E D L M esiga 223 224 Safety restraints 99 103 106 108 109 Belt Minder 110 extension assembly 108 for adults 104 106 108 for children 127 lap belt i irre 105 Occupant Classification DOLSOE REK KAMA 101 warning light and CHIME eese tre etu 109 110 Safety restraints LATCH anchors scs teret 136 Safety seats for children 131 Safety Compliance Certification Label 272 Scheduled Maintenance Guide Normal Scheduled Maintenance and Log 286 What Maintenance Schedule Should You Follow 282 DEALS sar kli 90 child safet
266. s Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e Move control down to disengage childproof locks INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle To open the luggage compartment door lid from within the luggage E compartment pull the illuminated T shaped handle and push up on the trunk lid The handle is composed of a material that will glow for hours in darkness following brief exposure to ambient light The T shaped handle will be located either on the luggage compartment door lid or inside the luggage compartment near the tail lamps WARNING Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child s reach Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the trunk and risk injury Children should be taught not to play in vehicles 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or animals unattended in the vehicle On hot days the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for e
267. s and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 169 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Example only MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXX IXXXXXXX amp TIRES XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXXiXX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX kPa XX PSLCOLD ATO KPa xX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ea TYPE XXX EXT PNT _ XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR TPPS R CANE TR SPR TXXXXX XXX OX X X XX XX JOQ000000000 XX XXXX XXXXXXX XX ue MFD E BY F FORD D MOTOR CC 0 ZO m UM a REAR PNBE AR Be 600048 Eris CONO es UM JOO0C XXXXX XXXX XXXXX 30000X RIMS TANTES XXxXXX AL AkPa PSAPC ox xx COLD A FROID prr MELEES VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX O00 TYPE XXX XXXX COMPLIFS2000 500 xxx XGXXXX Annum ll pl TP TR TANE mi SPR X XX X XXXX XXX 00000000000 XXX TXXXX00000X XX WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of c
268. s and hold to play the CD tracks in random order for the CD currently being played Press again to stop Rear console audio controls if equipped e NEXT Press to access the next radio memory preset the next CD track or the next tape selection e VOL Press the up arrow to increase the volume or the down arrow to decrease the volume e MODE Press to cycle through AM FM1 FM2 TAPE or CD if equipped modes 35 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from a station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station freguency is displayed Cassette player care e Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less e Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole and turnin
269. s placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Note A rear center passenger and or raised rear center headrest if equipped may also block the light from reaching the sensor Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place 58 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls Memory feature if equipped The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s door Refer to Memory seats outside rear view mirrors adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Auto dimming feature if equipped For the auto dimming feature on the driver s side view mirror refer to A
270. s transmission into the P Park gear position to continue to receive cool air from your A C system To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select A 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan to the highest speed 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel 40 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Climate Controls REAR CONSOLE CLIMATE CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED e TEMP Press to increase or decrease airflow temperature e FAN Press to increase or decrease the fan speed REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER 69 The rear defroster control is located on the instrument panel Press the rear defroster control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog A small LED will illuminate when the rear defroster is activated The ignition must be in the on position to operate the rear window defroster The defroster turns off automatically after a predetermined amount of time or when the ignition is turned off To manually turn off the defroster press the control again Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty 41
271. se damage not covered by your warranty Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations e Under the instrument panel e n the rear center console if equipped Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running 55 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used REAR CENTER CONSOLE FEATURES IF EQUIPPED The rear center console incorporates the following features e Utility compartment e Auxiliary power point if equipped e Remote radio climate controls if equipped e Remote seat adjustment if equipped Remote seat adjustment The rear passenger can move the front passen
272. set button a second time will display the idle meter hours followed by an H for hours The idle meter only accumulates time when the vehicle is in P Park or N Neutral Displayed time is cumulative for the vehicle It cannot be reset to zero Police Fleet vehicles often experience long periods of idling during which engine oil will continue to break down but distance is not accumulated on the odometer To assist fleet managers in maintaining proper oil change intervals the idle meter will help determine when an oil change is required For every hour that the vehicle idles it has accumulated the equivalent of approximately 33 miles 53 km of driving Using the combination of the vehicle odometer and idle meter allows the fleet manager to better determine when the oil needs to be changed Engine idle hour meter calculation Idle hours x 33 miles km equivalency Miles km driven miles km equivalency oil change interval Example When the odometer has accumulated 3 000 miles 4 800 km and the idle meter shows 61 hours a 5 000 mile 8 000 km oil change interval will have been reached 3 000 road miles 4 800 road km 61 idle hours x 33 miles 53 km idle hour 5 013 miles 8 067 km 296 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads Inspect frequently service as Replace cabin air filter if equipped re
273. sition 2 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint 4 90 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve adjust release button and pushing down on the head restraint x Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position A 91 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust release button and the unlock remove button then pull A up on the head restraint To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks 7 Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back
274. smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A in the U S or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC 37 A B D or F in Canada available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may caus
275. ss and release the 1 e 2 within five seconds of completing Step 1 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds to erase the customer programmed codes AII of the vehicle doors will lock and then unlock to confirm erasure All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Note To exit programming mode either wait 5 seconds after pressing 1 e 2 on the keypad or press the 7 e 8 and 9 e 0 pads simultaneously to lock all vehicle doors and end programming mode Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry keypad To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other Note The driver s door will unlock and the interior lamps will illuminate after the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code are correctly entered To unlock all doors press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To lock all doors press the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time You do not need to enter the keypad code first Note The interior lamps will turn off If the driver s door is ajar the doors will not lock Releasing the trunk with the keyless entry system To release open the trunk enter the factory set code or personal code driver door unlocks and press 5 e 6 within five seconds If your vehicle is equipped with the optional power decklid pressing 5 e 6 again will close it you may need to reenter the keypad code again
276. ss the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the side airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on 126 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles includi
277. start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city and highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light KA or CHECK FUEL CAP message on may cause the light to turn on as well If you must replace the fuel filler cap replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap is not used WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in personal injury FFV Flex Fuel Vehicle fuel cap If your vehicle is FFV capable it will have a yellow colored fuel cap Choosing the right fuel If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle FFV use only UNLEADED FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL Ed75 Ed85 If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle FFV then only use UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 1096 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could d
278. stem for leaks damage loose parts and foreign material Check battery performance Check operation of horn exterior lamps turn signals and hazard warning lights Check radiator coolers heater and air conditioning hoses Inspect windshield washer spray and wiper operation Check windshield for cracks chips and pitting Inspect for oil and fluid leaks Inspect engine air filter Inspect half shaft dust boots if equipped Check shocks and struts and other suspension components for leaks and damage Inspect steering and linkage Inspect accessory drive belt s Inspect clutch operation if equipped DCOCODODDODCCOCCCC O Be sure to ask your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It s a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle It s your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle You ll know what s been checked what s okay as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention The multi point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great 284 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Guide TD onton ate SE ume mmm Multi Point Inspection Report Gard as Recommended by Ford Motor Company Mare mE Lu oan Elbi Mips Vel Morelia m 5 5 5 5 TT T lm J 94 Her B Spak Pag
279. system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABS Airbag readiness If this light fails o gt to illuminate when the ignition is 9 turned to no continues to flash or IN remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light 13 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restrainis chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature pe Charging system Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component l Engine oil pressure Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Traction Control if equipped Flashes when the traction control system is active It will be illuminated solidly if there is a fault with the system and traction control will
280. t the exterior lamps turn off and the time delay is set High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever toward you to deactivate Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped The daytime running light system turns the headlamps on with a reduced light output when e the ignition is on e the transmission is not in P Park e the headlamp system is not turned on by another feature such as using the headlamp control or Autolamp N WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Light DRL System does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adeguate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision 43 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the oe instrument panel during headlight C 6 oog 7 and parking lamp operation J anda p e Rotate the thumbwheel from left 0001 A to right to brighten the instrument panel e Rotate the thumbwheel from right to left to dim the instrument panel During full daylight the instrument panel will still be visible with the headlamps operating Dome lamp control The panel dimmer control also controls the dome lamp op
281. t and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out Ge 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 134 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2
282. t deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Industrial strength heavy duty cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine bloc
283. t strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is 211 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of th
284. t that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag e If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Pass Airbag Off a Disabled Small child in child Lit Disabled safety seat or booster Small child with safety Lit Disabled belt buckled or unbuckled WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the 121 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor The front passenger sensing system may detect smal
285. t to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible at least half a tank Do not add less than five gallons 18 9L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration If you exclusively use E85 fuel it is recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change Fuel quality Unleaded gasoline engines If you experience starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start try a different brand of Regular unleaded gasoline 253 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced If the problems persist see your authorized dealer FFV engines If you experience starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start try a different brand of E85 fuel If the driveability problems continue fill the vehicle with regular unleaded gasoline and drive vehicle normally until gasoline is used See your authorized dealer if the problem persists Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any afterma
286. tely five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature 110 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The driver s and front The Belt Minder feature will not passenger s safety belts are activate buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt is not the safety belt warning light buckled when the vehicle has illuminates and the warning chime reached at least 3 mph sounds for six seconds every km h and 1 2 minutes have 30 seconds repeating for elapsed since the ignition approximately five minutes or until switch has been turned to on the safety belts are buckled The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light unbuckled for approximately illuminates and the warning chime one minute while the vehicle is sounds for six seconds every traveling at least 9 mph 30 seconds repeating for 5 km h and more than approximately five minutes or until 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the safety belts are buckled the ignition switch has been turned to on 111 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and S
287. ter ye fe ornament from the aluminum wheel pu with the tapered end of the wheel nut wrench that came with your C vehicle Insert and twist the handle then pry against the wheel 3 Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 208 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Before placing the jack under the vehicle NOTE the jack location markings JACK LOCATION FRONT The jack location markings can be found on the lower outer edge of n Ss the body js Locate the jack locator mark B SS semi circle on the body C f N near the tire you are changing 0 then place the jack D under the frame A of the vehicle aligning it with the mark B semi circle JACK LOCATION REAR The jack location markings can be found on the lower outer edge of SR the body LN Locate the jack locator mark B triangle on the body C near the tire you are changing then ace SS place the jack D under the Ot frame A of the vehicle aligning it with the mark B triangle Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground 209 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING To lessen risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the veh
288. the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 16 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Odometer Registers the total miles N kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Message center in this chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English and the odometer to the speedometer NU G885800D 8 mi Trip odometer See TRIP A B 3 under Message center in this TRIP A Wi mi Hour meter if equipped Your vehicle may be eguipped with an NEIN hour meter to indicate how much El i d USE time the vehicle is idling in Park or x Neutral The meter is incorporated i with the vehicle odometer Press N l APh and release the message center INFO button until ENGINE IDLE 0 HOURS appears in the display Press the RESET button to reset For every hour that the vehicle idles it has accumulated the equivalent of approximately 33 miles 53 km of driving Using the combination of the vehicle odometer and hour meter allows the fleet manager to better determine when the oil needs to be changed Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine 17 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left F in the fuel tank when the ignition is in t
289. ting USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure sho
290. ting the other 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a 4 mm wrench turn the adjuster either clockwise to adjust down or counterclockwise to adjust up The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 6 HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE 7 Close the hood and turn off the lamps 45 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights TURN SIGNAL CONTROL e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal INTERIOR LAMPS Map courtesy lamps To turn on the map lamps press the map lamp control Rear courtesy reading lamps The courtesy lamp lights when e the rocker control is pressed A O e any door is opened e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembly condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the 46 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal opera
291. tion Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 5096 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the following chart Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Function Headlamp Hi beam Headlamp Low beam Park and turn lamp front Sidemarker front Backup lamp Stop tail turn and sidemarker lamp rear Cornering lamp License plate lamp High mount brake lamp Stop Luggage compartment lamp Map lamp Visor vanity lamp Slide on Rail system SOR A6224PF 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Lights Rear grab handle reading lamps Glove compartment All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted To replace all instrument panel lig
292. tion the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 161 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire f
293. tion after you have finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters Note After 20 seconds you will automatically exit the programming mode 9 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been exited Illuminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door s or sound the personal alarm The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition switch is turned to the on or the accessory position or e the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or e after 25 seconds of illumination The dimmer panel control must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry system to operate The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or 81 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security e any door is open The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the last door is closed or after 10 minutes if the last door is left open SECURICODE M KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED You can use the keyless entry keypad to t 21 8 4 8 6 7 8 8 0 e lock or unlock the doors without using a key e open the trunk The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from your authorized dealer You can a
294. tions Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury 171 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The fo
295. tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used 151 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a reca
296. tivated the compression icon will illuminate in the display Occupancy mode Available on Premium plus audios Press MENU until occupancy mode appears in the display Press SEL TEXT p to select ALL DRIVER or REAR SEAT occupancy mode Autoset Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display Press lt Q SEL TEXT P gt to turn ON or OFF When the six strongest stations are filled the station Stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets When activated AUTOSET will appear in the display when any of the preset controls are pressed Speed sensitive volume Radio volume changes automatically and slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Press MENU to access and use SEL TEXT to adjust the volume setting The level will appear in the display Armrest ON OFF Press MENU repeatedly until Armrest ON OFF appears Use lt q SEL TEXT P to toggle the rear console audio controls ON or OFF if equipped Setting the clock Your vehicle is equipped with an in dash clock Refer to Clock in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on how to set the time 10 Memory presets To set a 2 station Sel
297. tomotive services With factory trained technicians and one stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire rotations to repairs like brake service check out the value your Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealers can offer WHICH MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SHOULD YOU FOLLOW Owner checks and services Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicated Service information and supporting specifications are provided in this owner s guide Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer or qualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service advice The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered by warranties so you may be charged for labor parts or lubricants used Maximum oil change interval O 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine coolant change interval 6 years or 105 000 miles 168 000 km change engine coolant whichever comes first C After initial change change engine coolant every 3 years or 45 000 miles 72 000 km 282 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Check tires for wear and correct air Check windshield washer fluid level Check engine oil level Check safety warning lamps brake Check cooling system fluid level and Check battery connections and dean Check washer spray wiper operation Check and lubricate
298. tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick 6 699 9 0 007604 Co RRSRSERRRRK 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again If the oil level is within this 4 1 range the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL SORKIN C ORE O If the oil level is below this mark engine oil must be added 4 to raise the level within the normal operating range If required add engine oil to the engine Refer to Adding engine oil in this chapter e Do not overfill the engine with oil Oil levels above this mark may cause engine CQ EE o damage If the engine is overfilled some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 238 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seate
299. tronic devices while refueling Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel filler cap When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off 3 Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe 4 To install the cap align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe 5 Turn the filler cap clockwise until it clicks at least once If the check fuel cap light R or a CHECK FUEL CAP message comes on the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed The light or message can come on after several driving events after you ve refueled your vehicle 251 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications At the next opportunity safely pull off of the road remove the fuel filler cap align the cap properly and reinstall it The check fuel cap light or CHECK FUEL CAP message may not reset immediately it may take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light or CHECK FUEL CAP message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine
300. tter which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on the driver s door panel 3 Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent 79 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER 2 Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board 3 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Snap the two halves back together Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost remote entry transmitters If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additio
301. ttom edge of the rear bumper e Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper 175 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e Causing internal damage to the components e Affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational RV towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 176 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Off shuts off the engine and all accessories locks the gearshift lever 3 and allows key removal 2 Accessory
302. tton 4 Reinstall the access plug cover start the vehicle and release the parking brake WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4 speed automatic transmission P Park This position locks the transmission P R N D l and prevents the rear wheels from ee a i turning To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear 189 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
303. uce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner Automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to use the automatic locking mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible Refer to Safety restrainis for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter 106 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehic
304. uching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg or upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 36 kg 141 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest Can the
305. uel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and longitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches your request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Commu
306. uid level Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the maximum level as this may result in leaks from the reservoir See Power steering fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The air suspension system is designed to improve ride handling and general vehicle performance during e Certain road conditions e Steering maneuvers e Braking e Accelerations This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level by automatically adding air or releasing air from the springs If you exceed the load limit the rear air suspension may not operate 187 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driving The air suspension shut off switch is located on the left side of the trunk If this switch is in the off position the rear air suspension will not operate WARNING On vehicles equipped with air suspension turn off the air suspension switch prior to jacking hoisting or towing your vehicle Normal vehicle operatio
307. uid reservoir Air filter assembly Engine oil dipstick access behind air tube Power steering fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir 00 10 O co rn KR Power distribution box 10 Battery 235 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID c Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to the Maintenance product specifications amd capacities section in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed
308. uld never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure 149 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you ov
309. urface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shif
310. utomatic dimming interior rear view mirror in this chapter Heated outside mirrors X if equipped Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated Note If your vehicle is equipped with the auto dimming feature the mirror glass is thicker and will take longer to defrost Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Fold away mirrors Pull the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash 59 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Driver Controls POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the A vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P Park position Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal v e Press the bottom of the control to adjust the pedals toward you e Press the top of the control to adjust the pedals away from you WARNING Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving SPEED CONTROL With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on th
311. ve not been designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer s limited warranty and or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood Elect
312. vel of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 36 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 242 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL or MIN MAX range as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application e Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules If the engine
313. ven a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries including brain damage Small children are particularly at risk REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Radio type approval numbers for remote entry receiver If the type approval of your remote entry system is inspected in one of the countries listed in the following table refer to the corresponding approval number Remote entry receiver certification numbers 01070305 ARTEL GABTEL CAZ ENG CA 04 11 1 TRC LPD 2004 28 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle 76 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors without a key Note The remote entry features operate with the ignition in any
314. will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages This allows you to use the full functionality of the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the RESET control and clearing the warning message Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories e They cannot be reset until the condition is corrected e They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset e They will not reappear until an ignition off on cycle has been completed This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the vehicle DOOR AJAR Displayed when a door is not completely closed POWERTRAIN MALFUNCTION Displayed when the powertrain is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 23 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE Displayed when the engine coolant is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible turn off the engine and let it cool Check the coolant and coolant level Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot CHECK FUEL CAP Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly
315. witch 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no fuel leak is apparent reset the fuel pump shut off switch by pressing the reset button 4 Turn the ignition to the on position Pause for a few seconds and return the key to the off position 5 Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire 195 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Kn Fuse link rating fuses fuses fuses fusco cartridge 34 Gey Grey 3A iler Violet 44 Pink Pm 1 A ma Tan 75A Brown Bom i m Rd i Bu Be 3 Natural Natural 4A Orange Green Green A Re Rei Red eoa Blue Yellow elo Ww ren
316. wners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Refer to Compass zone adjustment Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass calibration adjustment Compass zone adjustment 1 Determine your magnetic zone by Hu referring to the zone map e e RU 2 Turn ignition to the on position AN 3 Start the engine 4 Press SETUP to reach the Compass Odometer function 5 Press SETUP to snow COMPASS ZONE lt XX gt PRESS SELECT TO CHANGE 6 Press the SELECT control repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center The range of zone values are from 01 to 15 and wraps back to Ol Y 7 Nelordi1 7 To exit the zone setting mode and to lock in your change press and release the SETUP control Compass calibration adjustment Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical ac
317. ww safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 or online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx 224 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e t is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle e mmediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer e
318. y cables are disconnected it will be necessary to reset memory features Brakes e Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released Tires e Maintain recommended air pressure Miscellaneous e Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust e Move vehicles at least 25 feet 8 m every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion Removing vehicle from storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the following e Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces e Check windshield wipers for any deterioration e Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice squirrel nests e Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage e Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label e Check brake pedal operation Drive the vehicle 15 ft 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up e Check fluid levels including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels 266 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect If you have any concerns or issues contact your authorized dealer MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 4 6L V8 engine Air filter element FA 1032 Fuel
319. y in the event of a collision Seat mounted side airbag system Ae WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision 124 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided How does the side airbag system work The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags The side airbag system
320. y seats 131 cleaning e etes 230 easy access easyout feature 98 heated 97 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Index memory seat 79 99 SecuriCode keyless entry SYSTE iiis iei oie alal 82 SecuriLock passive anti theft SYSTEM iioii iie ek i s 84 Servicing your vehicle 233 Spark plugs specifications 267 271 Specification chart T bricants 5 ttn es 268 Speedcontrol 60 Starting a flex fuel vehicle 179 Starting your vehicle 177 179 Jump starting eem 211 Steering wheel GODLEOIS rr ertet 62 L ge iae nete ein 54 T Tilt steering wheel 54 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 161 TIVES inest ee 146 147 202 alignment ssl ema 154 CATE eee mak e aaa saa banaa 150 changing sesimin 202 207 checking the pressure 150 Inflating 148 IE 160 replacing sellemin 152 YOLAUlHB eret rers 154 safety practices 153 sidewall information 155 snow tires and chains 166 Spare De aeneus 203 205 terminology 147 307 Index tire grades ases tina ds 147 V ireadweat 4 ate 146 151 TOWING iiec ettet 173 O Vehicle Identification Number recreational towing 176 CIN
321. your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty Refer to Maintenance product specifications amd capacities in this chapter e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and distilled water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make su
322. ystem PATS XCVR If the type approval of your immobilizer system is inspected in one of the countries listed in the following table refer to the corresponding approval number 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security CC 020 CC 0820 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Your vehicle comes with three coded keys additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the 85 2011 Town Car tow Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Locks and Security engine If a problem occurs tur

Lincoln 2011 Town Car Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents